Endres+Hauser Proline Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA Operating Instruction

Add to my manuals

advertisement

Endres+Hauser Proline Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA Operating Instruction | Manualzz
Operating Manual
Proline Promag 53
PROFIBUS DP/PA
Electromagnetic Flow Measuring System
BA053D/06/EN/06.10
71116500
Valid as of version:
PROFIBUS DP: V 3.06.XX
(Device software)
PROFIBUS PA: V 3.06.XX
(Device software)
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Table of contents
Table of contents
1
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
Designated use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation, commissioning and operation . . . . . . . .
Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety conventions and icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.1
2.2
2.3
Device designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.1.1 Nameplate of the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.1.2 Nameplate of the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.1.3 Nameplate for connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.1
3.4
Incoming acceptance, transport and storage . . . . . .
3.1.1 Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.2 Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.3 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.2 Mounting location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.3 Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.4 Inlet and outlet runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.5 Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.6 Foundations, supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.7 Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.8 Nominal diameter and flow rate . . . . . . . .
3.2.9 Length of connecting cable . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.1 Installing the Promag W sensor . . . . . . . . .
3.3.2 Installing the Promag P sensor . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.3 Installing the Promag H sensor . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.4 Turning the transmitter housing . . . . . . . .
3.3.5 Turning the local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.6 Installing the wall-mount housing . . . . . . .
Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
6
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
4.1
PROFIBUS cable specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.1 PROFIBUS DP cable specification . . . . . . .
4.1.2 PROFIBUS PA cable specification . . . . . . . .
4.1.3 Shielding and grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the remote version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.1 Connecting Promag W/P/H . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2 Cable specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the measuring unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.1 Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.2 Transmitter connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.3 PROFIBUS DP connection diagram . . . . . .
4.3.4 PROFIBUS PA connection diagram . . . . . .
6.1
6.2
6.3
Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching on the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.1 Quick Setup "Commissioning" . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.2 Quick Setup "Pulsating Flow" . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.3 Quick Setup "Batching" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.4 Quick Setup "Communication" . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.5 Data backup/transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commissioning the PROFIBUS interface . . . . . . . .
6.4.1 PROFIBUS DP commissioning . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.2 PROFIBUS PA commissioning . . . . . . . . . .
3.2
3.3
4.2
4.3
Endress+Hauser
5
5
6
6
6
11
11
11
12
13
13
13
15
16
16
17
17
18
20
21
21
27
32
35
36
37
39
40
40
41
43
44
44
48
49
49
50
51
53
4.4
4.5
4.6
Potential matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.1 Potential equalization,
Promag W, Promag P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.2 Potential equalization, Promag H . . . . . . . .
4.4.3 Connection examples for
potential equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
5.1
5.2
Quick operation guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1 Display and operating elements . . . . . . . . .
5.2.2 Display (operating mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.3 Additional display functions . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.4 Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.5 Controlling the batching processes
using the local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief Operating Manual to the function matrix . . . .
5.3.1 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.2 Enabling the programming mode . . . . . . . .
5.3.3 Disabling the programming mode . . . . . . . .
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.1 Type of error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.2 Error message type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.1 Operating program "FieldCare" . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.2 Operating program
"SIMATIC PDM" (Siemens) . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.3 Device drivers for operating programs . . . .
Hardware PROFIBUS DP settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.1 Configuring the write protection . . . . . . . .
5.6.2 Configuring the device address . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.3 Configuring the terminating resistors . . . . .
5.6.4 Current output configuration . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.5 Relay output configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HardwarePROFIBUS PA settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.1 Configuring the write protection . . . . . . . .
5.7.2 Configuring the device address . . . . . . . . . .
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
6.4
56
56
56
56
58
59
60
61
61
62
62
63
65
66
67
67
67
68
68
68
69
69
69
70
72
72
73
74
75
76
77
77
78
79
79
80
80
82
85
88
90
91
91
94
3
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
Table of contents
PROFIBUS DP/PA system integration . . . . . . . . . . 96
6.5.1 Device master file (GSD file) . . . . . . . . . . . 96
6.5.2 Selection of the GSD file in the
measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
6.5.3 Compatibility to the previous model
Promag 33 (Profile Version 2.0) . . . . . . . . . 99
6.5.4 Maximum number of writes . . . . . . . . . . . 99
PROFIBUS DP cyclic data transmission . . . . . . . . 100
6.6.1 Block model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
6.6.2 Modules for cyclic data transmission . . . . 100
6.6.3 Description of the modules . . . . . . . . . . . 101
6.6.4 Configuration examples with
Simatic S7 HW-Konfig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
PROFIBUS PA cyclic data transmission . . . . . . . . . 110
6.7.1 Block model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
6.7.2 Modules for cyclic data transmission . . . . 110
6.7.3 Description of the modules . . . . . . . . . . . 111
6.7.4 Configuration examples with
Simatic S7 HW-Konfig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
PROFIBUS DP/PA acyclic data transmission . . . . 119
6.8.1 Master class 2 acyclic (MS2AC) . . . . . . . . 119
6.8.2 Master class 1 acyclic (MS1AC) . . . . . . . . 119
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
6.9.1 Empty-pipe/Full-pipe adjustment . . . . . . . 120
Data storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
6.10.1 HistoROM/S-DAT (Sensor DAT) . . . . . . . 121
6.10.2 HistoROM/T-DAT (Transmitter DAT) . . . 121
6.10.3 F-CHIP (Function Chip) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
7
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
7.1
7.2
Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
8
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
8.1
8.2
8.3
Device-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Measuring principle-specific accessories . . . . . . . . 123
Service-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
9
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
9.1
9.2
Troubleshooting instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.1 Displaying the device status
on PROFIBUS DP/PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.2 List of system error messages . . . . . . . . .
Process error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3.1 Displaying the device status
on PROFIBUS DP/PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3.2 List of process error messages . . . . . . . . .
Process errors without messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Failsafe mode of outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3
9.4
9.5
4
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.6.1 PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.6.2 PROFIBUS PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.6.3 Removing and installing
printed circuit boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.6.4 Replacing the device fuse . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.6.5 Replacing exchangeable
measuring electrodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SoftwareHistory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
141
141
142
10
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
10.1
Technical data at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.1 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.2 Function and system design . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.3 Input variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.4 Output variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.5 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.6 Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.7 Operating conditions: Installation . . . . . .
10.1.8 Operating conditions: Environment . . . . .
10.1.9 Operating conditions: Process . . . . . . . . .
10.1.10 Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.11 Human interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.12 Certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.13 Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.14 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.15 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
143
147
148
150
150
150
152
152
152
152
152
153
154
155
155
156
161
168
168
170
170
170
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
125
127
127
128
136
136
136
139
140
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Safety instructions
1
Safety instructions
1.1
Designated use
The measuring device described in this Operating Manual is to be used only for measuring the flow
rate of conductive fluids in closed pipes.
A minimum conductivity of 20 μS/cm is required for measuring demineralized water. Most liquids
can be measured as of a minimum conductivity of 5 μS/cm.
Examples:
• Acids, alkalis,
• Drinking water, wastewater, sewage sludge,
• Milk, beer, wine, mineral water, etc.
Resulting from incorrect use or from use other than that designated the operational safety of the
measuring devices can be suspended. The manufacturer accepts no liability for damages being
produced from this.
1.2
Installation, commissioning and operation
Note the following points:
• Installation, connection to the electricity supply, commissioning and maintenance of the device
must be carried out by trained, qualified specialists authorized to perform such work by the
facility's owner-operator. The specialist must have read and understood this Operating Manual
and must follow the instructions it contains.
• The device must be operated by persons authorized and trained by the facility's owner-operator.
Strict compliance with the instructions in the Operating Manual is mandatory.
• Endress+Hauser is willing to assist in clarifying the chemical resistance properties of parts wetted
by special fluids, including fluids used for cleaning. However, small changes in temperature,
concentration or the degree of contamination in the process can result in changes of the chemical
resistance properties. Therefore, Endress+Hauser can not guarantee or accept liability for the
chemical resistance properties of the fluid wetted materials in a specific application. The user is
responsible for the choice of fluid wetted materials in regards to their in-process resistance to
corrosion.
• If carrying out welding work on the piping, the welding unit must not be grounded by means of
the measuring device.
• The installer must ensure that the measuring system is correctly wired in accordance with the
wiring diagrams. The transmitter must be grounded, except in cases where special protective
measures have been taken (e.g. galvanically isolated power supply SELV or PELV).
• Always note the regulations applicable in your country to the operation, maintenance and repair
of electrical devices. Special instructions relating to the device can be found in the relevant
sections of this documentation.
Endress+Hauser
5
Safety instructions
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
1.3
Operational safety
Note the following points:
• Measuring systems for use in hazardous environments are accompanied by separate "Ex
documentation", which is an integral part of this Operating Manual. Strict compliance with the
installation instructions and ratings as stated in this supplementary documentation is mandatory.
The symbol on the front of this supplementary Ex documentation indicates the approval and the
certification body (e.g. 0 Europe, 1 USA, 1 Canada)
• The measuring device complies with the general safety requirements in accordance with
EN 61010-1, the EMC requirements of IEC/EN 61326, and NAMUR recommendations NE 21,
NE 43 and NE 53.
• Depending on the application, the seals of the process connections of the Promag H sensor require
periodic replacement.
• When hot fluid passes through the measuring tube, the surface temperature of the housing
increases. In the case of the sensor, in particular, users should expect temperatures that can be
close to the fluid temperature. If the temperature of the fluid is high, implement sufficient
measures to prevent burning or scalding.
• The manufacturer reserves the right to modify technical data without prior notice. Your
Endress+Hauser distributor will supply you with current information and updates to this
Operating Manual.
1.4
Returns
• Do not return a measuring device if you are not absolutely certain that all traces of hazardous
substances have been removed, e.g. substances which have penetrated crevices or diffused
through plastic.
• Costs incurred for waste disposal and injury (burns, etc.) due to inadequate cleaning will be
charged to the owner-operator.
• Please note the measures on → ä 150
1.5
Safety conventions and icons
The devices are designed to meet state-of-the-art safety requirements, have been tested, and left
the factory in a condition in which they are safe to operate. The devices comply with the applicable
standards and regulations in accordance with EN 61010-1 "Protection Measures for Electrical
Equipment for Measurement, Control, Regulation and Laboratory Procedures". The devices can,
however, be a source of danger if used incorrectly or for anything other than the designated use.
Consequently, always pay particular attention to the safety instructions indicated in this Operating
Manual by the following icons:
#
"
!
6
Warning!
"Warning" indicates an action or procedure which, if not performed correctly, can result in injury
or a safety hazard. Comply strictly with the instructions and proceed with care.
Caution!
"Caution" indicates an action or procedure which, if not performed correctly, can result in incorrect
operation or destruction of the device. Comply strictly with the instructions.
Note!
"Note" indicates an action or procedure which, if not performed correctly, can have an indirect
effect on operation or trigger an unexpected response on the part of the device.
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Identification
2
Identification
2.1
Device designation
The flow measuring system consists of the following components:
• Promag 53 transmitter
• Promag W, Promag P or Promag H sensor
Two versions are available:
• Compact version: transmitter and sensor form a single mechanical unit.
• Remote version: transmitter and sensor are installed separately.
2.1.1
Nameplate of the transmitter
8
9
PROMAG 53
1
2
3
4
Order Code: 53P1H-XXXXXXXXXXXX
Ser.No.:
12345678901
TAG No.:
ABCDEFGHJKLMNPQRST
IP67 / NEMA/Type 4X
20-55VAC/16-62VDC
50-60Hz 15VA/W
EPD/MSU
ECC
PROFIBUS DP (Profile 3.0), STATUS-IN
f-OUT, I-OUT
5
6
i
-20°C (-4°F) < Tamb < +60°C (+140°F)
P R O F I
7
B U S
N12895
R
Pat. UK EP 541 878 EP 618 680
Pat. UK 2 084 740 EP 219 725 EP 521 169
Pat. US 5,323,156 5,479,007
Pat. US 4,382,387 4,704,908 5,351,554
a0004554
Fig. 1:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Endress+Hauser
Nameplate specifications for the "Promag 53" transmitter (example)
Order code/serial number: Refer to the specifications on the order confirmation for the meanings of the individual
letters and digits.
Power supply/frequency/power consumption
Additional functions and software
Available inputs and outputs
Reserved for information on special products
Please refer to operating instructions / documentation
Reserved for certificates, approvals and for additional information on device version
Ambient temperature range
Degree of protection
7
Identification
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
2.1.2
Nameplate of the sensor
PROMAG P
1
2
3
4
5
Order Code: 50PXX-XXXXXXXXXXXX
Ser.No.:
12345678901 RY
TAG No.:
ABCDEFGHJKLMNPQRST
2007
1.0000/0000
DN100 DIN/EN PN40 pnom =PS= 40bar
TM:
–10°C...150°C/+14°F...300°F
Materials: PFA
Electrodes: 1.4435/316L
0.2% CAL
10
EPD/MSÜ, R/B
11
-20°C (-4°F)<Tamb<+60°C (+140°F)
IP67
NEMA/Type4X
12
K-factor:
6
7
8
i
9
N12895
13
a0004374
Fig. 2:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
8
Nameplate specifications for the "Promag" sensor (example)
Order code/serial number: See the specifications on the order confirmation for the meanings of the individual
letters and digits.
Calibration factor with zero point
Nominal diameter/nominal pressure
Medium temperature range
Materials: lining/measuring electrode
Reserved for information on special products
Permitted ambient temperature range
Please refer to operating instructions / documentation
Reserved for additional information on device version (approvals, certificates)
Calibration tolerance
Additional information
– EPD: with empty pipe detection electrode
– R/B: with reference electrode (only for Promag P)
Degree of protection
Flow direction
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Identification
Nameplate for connections
1
12345678912
Supply /
Versorgung /
Tension d'alimentation
26 = B (RxD/TxD-P)
27 = A (RxD/TxD-N)
2
L1/L+
N/LPE
2
3
26(+) / 27(-)
4
Ser.No.:
active
passive
normally open contact
normally closed contact
24(+) / 25(-)
1
A:
P:
NO:
NC:
20(+) / 21(-)
See operating manual
Betriebsanleitung beachten
Observer manuel d'instruction
22(+) / 23(-)
2.1.3
X
PROFIBUS DP (Profile 3.0)
3...30 VDC, Ri = 3 kOhm
P
STATUS–IN
5
6
7
8
9
max. 60 VDC / 0.1 A
max. 30 VAC / 0.5 A
RELAY
max. 60 VDC / 0.1 A
max. 30 VAC / 0.5 A
RELAY
Ex-works / ab-Werk / réglages usine
Device SW: XX.XX.XX (WEA)
Communication: PROFIBUS DP
Drivers: ID XXXX (HEX)
Date: DD. MMM. YYYY
NO
NC
Update 1
Update 2
319475-00XX
a0004562
Fig. 3:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Endress+Hauser
Nameplate specifications for "Promag" transmitter connections (example)
Serial number
Possible configuration of current output
Possible configuration of relay contacts
Terminal assignment, cable for power supply: 85 to 260 V AC, 20 to 55 V AC, 16 to 62 V DC
Terminal No. 1: L1 for AC, L+ for DC
Terminal No. 2: N for AC, L- for DC
Pending signals at the inputs and outputs
possible configurations and terminal assignment
Version of device software currently installed (inclusive language group)
Installed communication type
PROFIBUS ID No.
Date of installation
Current updates to data specified in points 6 to 9
9
Identification
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
2.2
Certificates and approvals
The devices are designed in accordance with good engineering practice to meet state-of-the-art
safety requirements, have been tested, and left the factory in a condition in which they are safe to
operate. The devices comply with the applicable standards and regulations in accordance with
EN 61010-1 "Protection Measures for Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control, Regulation
and Laboratory Procedures" and with the EMC requirements of IEC/EN 61326.
The measuring system described in this Operating Manual is therefore in conformity with the
statutory requirements of the EC Directives. Endress+Hauser confirms successful testing of the
device by affixing to it the CE mark.
The measuring system is in conformity with the EMC requirements of the "Australian
Communications and Media Authority (ACMA)".
The flowmeter has successfully passed all the test procedures carried out and is certified and
registered by the PNO (PROFIBUS User Organization).
The device thus meets all the requirements of the following specifications:
• Certified to PROFIBUS Specification Profile 3.0 version
(Device certification number: provided upon request)
• The measuring device can also be operated with certified devices of other manufacturers
(interoperability).
2.3
Registered trademarks
KALREZ® and VITON®
Registered trademarks of E.I. Du Pont de Nemours & Co., Wilmington, USA
TRI-CLAMP®
Registered trademark of Ladish & Co., Inc., Kenosha, USA
PROFIBUS®
Registered trademark of the PROFIBUS User Organization, Karlsruhe, D
HistoROM™, S-DAT®, T-DAT™, F-CHIP®, FieldCare®, Fieldcheck®, Applicator®
Registered or registration-pending trademarks of Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG, Reinach, CH
10
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Installation
3
Installation
3.1
Incoming acceptance, transport and storage
3.1.1
Incoming acceptance
On receipt of the goods, check the following points:
• Check the packaging and the contents for damage.
• Check the shipment, make sure nothing is missing and that the scope of supply matches your
order.
3.1.2
Transport
The following instructions apply to unpacking and to transporting the device to its final location:
• Transport the devices in the containers in which they are delivered.
• Do not remove the protection plates or caps on the process connections until you are ready to
install the device. This is particularly important in the case of sensors with PTFE linings.
Special notes on flanged devices
"
Caution!
• The wooden covers mounted on the flanges before the device leaves the factory protect the linings
on the flanges during storage and transportation. Do not remove these protection plates until
immediately before the device is installed in the pipe.
• Do not lift flanged devices by the transmitter housing or, in the case of the remote version, by the
connection housing.
Transporting flanged devices (DN ≤300) 12"
Use webbing slings slung round the two process connections. Do not use chains, as they could
damage the housing.
#
Warning!
Risk of injury if the measuring device slips. The center of gravity of the assembled measuring device
might be higher than the points around which the slings are slung.
At all times, therefore, make sure that the device does not unexpectedly turn around its axis or slip.
a0004294
Fig. 4:
Endress+Hauser
Transporting sensors with DN > ≤300 (12")
11
Installation
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Transporting flanged devices DN 300 (12")
Use only the metal eyes on the flanges for transporting the device, lifting it and positioning the
sensor in the piping.
"
Caution!
Do not attempt to lift the sensor with the tines of a fork-lift truck beneath the metal casing. This
would buckle the casing and damage the internal magnetic coils.
a0004295
Fig. 5:
3.1.3
Transporting sensors with DN > 300 (12")
Storage
Note the following points:
• Pack the measuring device in such a way as to protect it reliably against impact for storage (and
transportation). The original packaging provides optimum protection.
• The storage temperature corresponds to the operating temperature range of the measuring
transmitter and the appropriate measuring sensors → ä 155.
• The measuring device must be protected against direct sunlight during storage in order to avoid
unacceptably high surface temperatures.
• Choose a storage location where moisture does not collect in the measuring device. This will help
prevent fungus and bacteria infestation which can damage the lining.
• Do not remove the protection plates or caps on the process connections until you are ready to
install the device. This is particularly important in the case of sensors with PTFE linings.
12
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Installation
3.2
Installation conditions
3.2.1
Dimensions
The dimensions and installation lengths of the sensor and transmitter can be found in the "Technical
Information" for the device in question. This document can be downloaded as a PDF file from
www.endress.com. A list of the "Technical Information" documents available is provided in the
"Documentation" section on → ä 170.
3.2.2
Mounting location
The accumulation of air or gas bubbles in the measuring tube could result in an increase in
measuring errors.
Avoid the following locations:
• At the highest point of a pipeline. Risk of air accumulating.
• Directly upstream from a free pipe outlet in a vertical pipeline.
h 2 x DN
A0011899
Fig. 6:
Mounting location
Installing pumps
Do not install the sensor on the intake side of a pump. This precaution is to avoid low pressure and
the consequent risk of damage to the lining of the measuring tube. Information on the lining's
resistance to partial vacuum → ä 158.
It might be necessary to install pulse dampers in systems incorporating reciprocating, diaphragm or
peristaltic pumps. Information on the measuring system's resistance to vibration and shock
→ ä 155.
A0011900
Fig. 7:
Endress+Hauser
Installing pumps
13
Installation
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Partially filled pipes
"
Partially filled pipes with gradients necessitate a drain-type configuration. The Empty Pipe Detection
function offers additional protection by detecting empty or partially filled pipes → ä 120.
Caution!
Risk of solids accumulating. Do not install the sensor at the lowest point in the drain. It is advisable
to install a cleaning valve.
2 x DN
5 x DN
A0011901
Fig. 8:
Installation in partially filled pipe
Down pipes
Install a siphon or a vent valve downstream of the sensor in down pipes longer than 5 meters
(16,3 ft). This precaution is to avoid low pressure and the consequent risk of damage to the lining
of the measuring tube. This measure also prevents the system losing prime, which could cause air
inclusions.
Information on the lining's resistance to partial vacuum → ä 158
1
h
2
A0011902
Fig. 9:
1
2
h
14
Measures for installation in a down pipe
Vent valve
Siphon
Length of down pipe h ≥ 5 m (16,3 ft)
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Installation
3.2.3
Orientation
An optimum orientation position helps avoid gas and air accumulations and deposits in the
measuring tube. Promag, nevertheless, supplies a range of functions and accessories for correct
measuring of problematic fluids:
• Electrode Cleaning Circuitry (ECC) to prevent electrically conductive deposits in the measuring
tube, e.g. for fluids causing buildup (see "Description of Device Functions" manual).
• Empty Pipe Detection (EPD) ensures the detection of partially filled measuring tubes or in the case
of degassing fluids → ä 120.
Vertical orientation
A vertical orientation is ideal in the following cases:
• For self-emptying piping systems and when using empty pipe detection.
• For sludge containing sand or stones and where the solids cause sedimentation.
A0011903
Fig. 10:
Vertical orientation
Horizontal orientation
The measuring electrode plane should be horizontal. This prevents brief insulation of the two
electrodes by entrained air bubbles.
"
Caution!
Empty Pipe Detection functions correctly with the measuring device installed horizontally only
when the transmitter housing is facing upward (see diagram). Otherwise there is no guarantee that
Empty Pipe Detection will respond if the measuring tube is only partially filled.
A
1
2
2
A
3
A0011904
Fig. 11:
1
2
3
Endress+Hauser
Horizontal orientation
EPD electrode for empty pipe detection
(not available for "measuring electrode only" option, not in Promag H, DN 2 to 15 (1/12" to ½"))
Measuring electrodes for signal detection
Reference electrode for potential equalization
(not available for "measuring electrode only" option, not in Promag H)
15
Installation
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
3.2.4
Inlet and outlet runs
If possible, install the sensor in a location upstream of fittings such as valves, T-pieces, elbows, etc.
Compliance with the following requirements for the inlet and outlet runs is necessary in order to
ensure measuring accuracy.
• Inlet run ≥ 5 × DN
• Outlet run ≥ 2 × DN
5 x DN
2 x DN
A0011905
Fig. 12:
3.2.5
Inlet and outlet runs
Vibrations
Secure and fix both the piping and the sensor if the vibrations are severe.
"
Caution!
It is advisable to install sensor and transmitter separately if vibration is excessively severe.
Information on the permitted resistance to vibration and shock → ä 155.
L
A0011906
Fig. 13:
16
Measures to prevent vibration of the measuring device (L > 10 m/33 ft)
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Installation
3.2.6
Foundations, supports
If the nominal diameter is DN ≥ 350 (14"), mount the sensor on a foundation of adequate loadbearing strength.
"
Caution!
Risk of damage.
Do not support the weight of the sensor on the metal casing: the casing would buckle and damage
the internal magnetic coils.
a0003209
Fig. 14:
3.2.7
Correct support for large nominal diameters (DN ≥ 350/14")
Adapters
Suitable adapters to DIN EN 545 (double-flange reducers) can be used to install the sensor in largerdiameter pipes. The resultant increase in the rate of flow improves measuring accuracy with very
slow-moving fluids.
The nomogram shown here can be used to calculate the pressure loss caused by cross-section
reduction.
!
Note!
The nomogram only applies to liquids of viscosity similar to water.
1.
Calculate the ratio of the diameters d/D.
2.
From the nomogram, read off the pressure loss as a function of fluid velocity (downstream from
the reduction) and the d/D ratio.
[mbar] 100
8 m/s
7 m/s
6 m/s
10
5 m/s
4 m/s
max. 8°
3 m/s
d
D
2 m/s
1
1 m/s
d/D
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
A0011907
Fig. 15:
Endress+Hauser
Pressure loss due to adapters
17
Installation
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
3.2.8
Nominal diameter and flow rate
The diameter of the pipe and the flow rate determine the nominal diameter of the sensor. The
optimum velocity of flow is between 2 and 3 m/s (6.5 to 9.8 ft/s)
The velocity of flow (v), moreover, has to be matched to the physical properties of the fluid:
• v < 2 m/s (v < 6.5 ft/s): for abrasive fluids
• v > 2 m/s (v > 6.5 ft/s): for fluids producing buildup
!
Note!
Flow velocity can be increased, if necessary, by reducing the nominal diameter of the sensor
(→ ä 17).
Recommended flow (SI units)
Nominal diameter
[mm]
Promag P
Promag H
Min./max. full scale value (v ≈ 0.3 or 10 m/s) in [dm³/min]
2
–
–
0.06 to 1.8
4
–
–
0.25 to 7
8
–
–
1 to 30
15
–
4 to 100
4 to 100
25
9 to 300
9 to 300
9 to 300
32
15 to 500
15 to 500
–
40
25 to 700
25 to 700
25 to 700
50
35 to 1100
35 to 1100
35 to 1100
65
60 to 2000
60 to 2000
60 to 2000
80
90 to 3000
90 to 3000
90 to 3000
100
145 to 4700
145 to 4700
145 to 4700
125
220 to 7500
220 to 7500
–
[mm]
18
Promag W
Min./max. full scale value (v ≈ 0.3 or 10 m/s) in [m³/h]
150
20 to 600
20 to 600
–
200
35 to 1100
35 to 1100
–
250
55 to 1700
55 to 1700
–
300
80 to 2400
80 to 2400
–
350
110 to 3300
110 to 3300
–
375
140 to 4200
–
–
400
140 to 4200
140 to 4200
–
450
180 to 5400
180 to 5400
–
500
220 to 6600
220 to 6600
–
600
310 to 9600
310 to 9600
–
700
420 to 13500
–
–
800
550 to 18000
–
–
900
690 to 22500
–
–
1000
850 to 28000
–
–
1200
1250 to 40000
–
–
1400
1700 to 55000
–
–
1600
2200 to 70000
–
–
1800
2800 to 90000
–
–
2000
3400 to 110000
–
–
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Installation
Recommended flow (US units)
Nominal diameter
[inch]
1 1/12"
Promag P
Promag H
Min./max. full scale value (v ≈ 0.3 or 10 m/s) in [gal/min]
–
–
0.015 to 0.5
32"
–
–
0.07 to 2
16"
–
–
0.25 to 8
/ 2"
–
1.0 to 27
1.0 to 27
1"
2.5 to 80
2.5 to 80
2.5 to 80
5/
5/
1
1/
4"
4 to 130
4 to 130
–
1 1/2"
7 to 190
7 to 190
7 to 190
2"
10 to 300
10 to 300
10 to 300
2 1/2"
16 to 500
16 to 500
16 to 500
1
3"
24 to 800
24 to 800
24 to 800
4"
40 to 1250
40 to 1250
40 to 1250
5"
60 to 1950
60 to 1950
–
6"
90 to 2650
90 to 2650
–
8"
155 to 4850
155 to 4850
–
10"
250 to 7500
250 to 7500
–
12"
350 to 10600
350 to 10600
–
14"
500 to 15000
500 to 15000
–
15"
600 to 19000
–
–
16"
600 to 19000
600 to 19000
–
18"
800 to 24000
800 to 24000
–
20"
1000 to 30000
1000 to 30000
–
24"
1400 to 44000
1400 to 44000
–
28"
1900 to 60000
–
–
30"
2150 to 67000
–
–
32"
2450 to 80000
–
–
36"
3100 to 100000
–
–
40"
3800 to 125000
–
–
42"
4200 to 135000
–
–
48"
5500 to 175000
–
–
[inch]
Endress+Hauser
Promag W
Min./max. full scale value (v ≈ 0.3 or 10 m/s) in [Mgal/d]
54"
9 to 300
–
–
60"
12 to 380
–
–
66"
14 to 500
–
–
72"
16 to 570
–
–
78"
18 to 650
–
–
19
Installation
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
3.2.9
Length of connecting cable
In order to ensure measuring accuracy, please comply with the following instructions when
installing the remote version:
• Secure the cable run or route the cable in an armored conduit. Movement of the cable can falsify
the measuring signal, particularly if the fluid conductivity is low.
• Route the cable well clear of electrical machines and switching elements.
• Ensure potential equalization between sensor and transmitter, if necessary.
• The permissible cable length Lmax depends on the fluid conductivity (→ å 16).
• The maximum connecting cable length is 10 m (32.8 ft) when empty pipe detection
(EPD → ä 120) is switched on.
[µS/cm]
200
100
L max
5
[m]
10
100
L max
200
[ft]
0
200
400
600
a0010734
Fig. 16:
Permitted lengths for connecting cable in remote version, as a function of the conductivity of the fluid
Gray shaded area = permissible range
Lmax = length of connecting cable
20
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
!
Installation
3.3
Installation
3.3.1
Installing the Promag W sensor
Note!
Bolts, nuts, seals, etc. are not included in the scope of supply and must be supplied by the customer.
The sensor is designed for installation between the two piping flanges:
• It is essential that you observe the necessary screw tightening torques on → ä 22.
• If grounding disks are used, follow the mounting instructions which will be enclosed with the
shipment.
A0011908
Fig. 17:
Installing the Promag W sensor
Seals
Comply with the following instructions when installing seals:
• Hard rubber lining → additional seals are always required.
• Polyurethane lining → seals are not required.
• Only use seals that comply with DIN EN 1514-1 for DIN flanges.
• Make sure that the seals do not protrude into the piping cross-section.
"
Caution!
Risk of short circuit! Do not use electrically conductive sealing compound such as graphite. An
electrically conductive layer could form on the inside of the measuring tube and short-circuit the
measuring signal.
Ground cable
• If necessary, special ground cables can be ordered as accessories for potential equalization,
→ ä 123.
• For information on potential equalization and detailed installation instructions for using ground
cables, please refer to → ä 56.
Endress+Hauser
21
Installation
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Screw tightening torques (Promag W)
Note the following points:
• The tightening torques listed below are for lubricated threads only.
• Always tighten the screws uniformly and in diagonally opposite sequence.
• Overtightening the screws will deform the sealing faces or damage the seals.
• The tightening torques listed below apply only to pipes not subjected to tensile stress.
Tightening torques for:
• EN (DIN) → ä 22
• JIS → ä 24
• ANSI → ä 24
• AWWA → ä 25
• AS 2129 → ä 25
• AS 4087 → ä 26
Promag W tightening torques for EN (DIN)
22
Nominal diameter
EN (DIN)
[mm]
Pressure rating
[bar]
Screws
Hard rubber
Max. tightening torque [Nm]
Polyurethane
25
PN 40
4 × M 12
-
15
32
PN 40
4 × M 16
-
24
40
PN 40
4 × M 16
-
31
50
PN 40
4 × M 16
48
40
65*
PN 16
8 × M 16
32
27
65
PN 40
8 × M 16
32
27
80
PN 16
8 × M 16
40
34
80
PN 40
8 × M 16
40
34
100
PN 16
8 × M 16
43
36
100
PN 40
8 × M 20
59
50
125
PN 16
8 × M 16
56
48
125
PN 40
8 × M 24
83
71
150
PN 16
8 × M 20
74
63
150
PN 40
8 × M 24
104
88
200
PN 10
8 × M 20
106
91
200
PN 16
12 × M 20
70
61
200
PN 25
12 × M 24
104
92
250
PN 10
12 × M 20
82
71
250
PN 16
12 × M 24
98
85
250
PN 25
12 × M 27
150
134
300
PN 10
12 × M 20
94
81
300
PN 16
12 × M 24
134
118
300
PN 25
16 × M 27
153
138
350
PN 6
12 × M 20
111
120
350
PN 10
16 × M 20
112
118
350
PN 16
16 × M 24
152
165
350
PN 25
16 × M 30
227
252
400
PN 6
16 × M 20
90
98
400
PN 10
16 × M 24
151
167
400
PN 16
16 × M 27
193
215
400
PN 25
16 × M 33
289
326
450
PN 6
16 × M 20
112
126
450
PN 10
20 × M 24
153
133
450
PN 16
20 × M 27
198
196
450
PN 25
20 × M 33
256
253
500
PN 6
20 × M 20
119
123
500
PN 10
20 × M 24
155
171
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Installation
Nominal diameter
EN (DIN)
[mm]
Pressure rating
[bar]
Screws
Hard rubber
Max. tightening torque [Nm]
Polyurethane
500
PN 16
20 × M 30
275
300
500
PN 25
20 × M 33
317
360
600
PN 6
20 × M 24
139
147
600
PN 10
20 × M 27
206
219
600 *
PN 16
20 × M 33
415
443
600
PN 25
20 × M 36
431
516
700
PN 6
24 × M 24
148
139
700
PN 10
24 × M 27
246
246
700
PN 16
24 × M 33
278
318
700
PN 25
24 × M 39
449
507
800
PN 6
24 × M 27
206
182
800
PN 10
24 × M 30
331
316
800
PN 16
24 × M 36
369
385
800
PN 25
24 × M 45
664
721
900
PN 6
24 × M 27
230
637
900
PN 10
28 × M 30
316
307
900
PN 16
28 × M 36
353
398
900
PN 25
28 × M 45
690
716
1000
PN 6
28 × M 27
218
208
1000
PN 10
28 × M 33
402
405
1000
PN 16
28 × M 39
502
518
1000
PN 25
28 × M 52
970
971
1200
PN 6
32 × M 30
319
299
1200
PN 10
32 × M 36
564
568
1200
PN 16
32 × M 45
701
753
1400
PN 6
36 × M 33
430
398
1400
PN 10
36 × M 39
654
618
1400
PN 16
36 × M 45
729
762
1600
PN 6
40 × M 33
440
417
1600
PN 10
40 × M 45
946
893
1600
PN 16
40 × M 52
1007
1100
1800
PN 6
44 × M 36
547
521
1800
PN 10
44 × M 45
961
895
1800
PN 16
44 × M 52
1108
1003
2000
PN 6
48 × M 39
629
605
2000
PN 10
48 × M 45
1047
1092
2000
PN 16
48 × M 56
1324
1261
* Designed acc. to EN 1092-1 (not to DIN 2501)
Endress+Hauser
23
Installation
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Promag W tightening torques for JIS
Sensor
Nominal diameter
JIS
Pressure rating
Screws
[mm]
Max. tightening torque [Nm]
Hard rubber
Polyurethane
25
10K
4 × M 16
–
19
25
20K
4 × M 16
–
19
32
10K
4 × M 16
–
22
32
20K
4 × M 16
–
22
40
10K
4 × M 16
–
24
40
20K
4 × M 16
–
24
50
10K
4 × M 16
40
33
50
20K
8 × M 16
20
17
65
10K
4 × M 16
55
45
65
20K
8 × M 16
28
23
80
10K
8 × M 16
29
23
80
20K
8 × M 20
42
35
100
10K
8 × M 16
35
29
100
20K
8 × M 20
56
48
125
10K
8 × M 20
60
51
125
20K
8 × M 22
91
79
150
10K
8 × M 20
75
63
150
20K
12 × M 22
81
72
200
10K
12 × M 20
61
52
200
20K
12 × M 22
91
80
250
10K
12 × M 22
100
87
250
20K
12 × M 24
159
144
300
10K
16 × M 22
74
63
300
20K
16 × M 24
138
124
Promag W tightening torques for ANSI
24
Sensor
Nominal
diameter
ANSI
Pressure rating
[inch]
[lbs]
1"
Class 150
1"
Class 300
1 ½"
Class 150
1 ½"
Class 300
2"
2"
Screws
Max. tightening torque [Nm]
Hard rubber
Polyurethane
4 × ½"
–
7
4 × 5/8"
–
8
4 × ½"
–
10
4 × ¾"
–
15
Class 150
4 × 5/8"
35
22
Class 300
8 × 5/8"
18
11
3"
Class 150
4 × 5/8"
60
43
3"
Class 300
8 × ¾"
38
26
4"
Class 150
8 × 5/8"
42
31
4"
Class 300
8 × ¾"
58
40
6"
Class 150
8 × ¾"
79
59
6"
Class 300
12 × ¾"
70
51
8"
Class 150
8 × ¾"
107
80
10"
Class 150
12 × 7/8"
101
75
12"
Class 150
12 × 7/8"
133
103
14"
Class 150
12 × 1"
135
158
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Installation
Sensor
Nominal
diameter
ANSI
Pressure rating
[inch]
[lbs]
Screws
Max. tightening torque [Nm]
Hard rubber
Polyurethane
16"
Class 150
16 × 1"
128
150
18"
Class 150
16 × 1 1/8"
204
234
20"
Class 150
20 × 1 1/8"
183
217
24"
Class 150
20 × 1 ¼
268
307
Promag W tightening torques for AWWA
Sensor
Nominal
diameter
AWWA
Pressure rating
Screws
Hard rubber
Polyurethane
28"
Class D
28 × 1 ¼"
247
292
30"
Class D
28 × 1 ¼"
287
302
32"
Class D
28 × 1 ½"
394
422
36"
Class D
32 × 1 ½"
419
430
40"
Class D
36 × 1 ½"
420
477
42"
Class D
36 × 1 ½"
528
518
48"
Class D
44 × 1 ½"
552
531
54"
Class D
44 × 1 ¾"
730
633
60"
Class D
52 × 1 ¾"
758
832
66"
Class D
52 × 1 ¾"
946
955
72"
Class D
60 × 1 ¾"
975
1087
78"
Class D
64 × 2"
853
786
[inch]
Max. tightening torque [Nm]
Promag W tightening torques for AS 2129
Sensor
Nominal diameter
AS 2129
Pressure rating
Screws
[mm]
Endress+Hauser
Max. tightening torque [Nm]
Hard rubber
50
Table E
4 × M 16
32
80
Table E
4 × M 16
49
100
Table E
8 × M 16
38
150
Table E
8 × M 20
64
200
Table E
8 × M 20
96
250
Table E
12 × M 20
98
300
Table E
12 × M 24
123
350
Table E
12 × M 24
203
400
Table E
12 × M 24
226
500
Table E
16 × M 24
271
600
Table E
16 × M 30
439
700
Table E
20 × M 30
355
750
Table E
20 × M 30
559
800
Table E
20 × M 30
631
900
Table E
24 × M 30
627
1000
Table E
24 × M 30
634
1200
Table E
32 × M 30
727
25
Installation
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Promag W tightening torques for AS 4087
Sensor
Nominal diameter
AS 4087
Pressure rating
Screws
[mm]
26
Max. tightening torque [Nm]
Hard rubber
50
PN 16
4 × M 16
32
80
PN 16
4 × M 16
49
100
PN 16
8 × M 16
38
150
PN 16
8 × M 20
52
200
PN 16
8 × M 20
77
250
PN 16
8 × M 20
147
300
PN 16
12 × M 24
103
350
PN 16
12 × M 24
203
375
PN 16
12 × M 24
137
400
PN 16
12 × M 24
226
500
PN 16
16 × M 24
271
600
PN 16
16 × M 30
393
700
PN 16
20 × M 27
330
750
PN 16
20 × M 30
529
800
PN 16
20 × M 33
631
900
PN 16
24 × M 33
627
1000
PN 16
24 × M 33
595
1200
PN 16
32 × M 33
703
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Installation
3.3.2
"
!
Installing the Promag P sensor
Caution!
• The protective covers mounted on the two sensor flanges guard the PTFE lining, which is turned
over the flanges. Consequently, do not remove these protection plates until immediately before
the sensor is installed in the pipe.
• Protection plates must remain in place while the device is in storage.
• Make sure that the lining is not damaged or removed from the flanges.
Note!
Bolts, nuts, seals, etc. are not included in the scope of supply and must be supplied by the customer.
The sensor is designed for installation between the two piping flanges:
• It is essential that you observe the necessary screw tightening torques on → ä 28.
• If grounding disks are used, follow the mounting instructions which will be enclosed with the
shipment.
A0011908
Fig. 18:
Installing the Promag P sensor
Seals
Comply with the following instructions when installing seals:
• PFA or PTFE lining → seals are not required.
• Only use seals that comply with DIN EN 1514-1 for DIN flanges.
• Make sure that the seals do not protrude into the piping cross-section.
"
Caution!
Risk of short circuit! Do not use electrically conductive sealing compound such as graphite. An
electrically conductive layer could form on the inside of the measuring tube and short-circuit the
measuring signal.
Ground cable
• If necessary, special ground cables can be ordered as accessories for potential equalization,
→ ä 123.
• For information on potential equalization and detailed installation instructions for using ground
cables, please refer to → ä 56.
Endress+Hauser
27
Installation
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Installing the high-temperature version (with PFA lining)
The high-temperature version has a housing support for the thermal separation of sensor and
transmitter. The high-temperature version is always used for applications in which high ambient
temperatures are encountered in conjunction with high fluid temperatures. The high-temperature
version is obligatory if the fluid temperature exceeds +150 °C (+300 °F).
!
Note!
You will find information on permissible temperature ranges on → ä 156.
Insulation
Pipes generally have to be insulated if they carry very hot fluids to avoid energy losses and prevent
accidental contact with pipes at temperatures that could cause injury. Guidelines regulating the
insulation of pipes have to be taken into account.
"
Caution!
Risk of electronics overheating. The housing support dissipates heat and its entire surface area must
remain uncovered. Make sure that the sensor insulation does not extend past the top of the two
sensor half-shells.
max.
Esc
-
+
E
a0004300
Fig. 19:
Promag P sensor (high-temperature version): insulating the pipe
Screw tightening torques (Promag P)
Note the following points:
• The tightening torques listed below are for lubricated threads only.
• Always tighten the screws uniformly and in diagonally opposite sequence.
• Overtightening the screws will deform the sealing faces or damage the seals.
• The tightening torques listed below apply only to pipes not subjected to tensile stress.
Tightening torques for:
• EN (DIN) → ä 29
• ANSI → ä 30
• JIS → ä 30
• AS 2129 → ä 31
• AS 4087 → ä 31
28
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Installation
Promag P tightening torques for EN (DIN)
Nominal diameter
EN (DIN)
Pressure rating
Screws
Max. tightening torque [Nm]
[mm]
[bar]
15
PN 40
4 × M 12
11
–
25
PN 40
4 × M 12
26
20
32
PN 40
4 × M 16
41
35
40
PN 40
4 × M 16
52
47
PTFE
PFA
50
PN 40
4 × M 16
65
59
65 *
PN 16
8 × M 16
43
40
65
PN 40
8 × M 16
43
40
80
PN 16
8 × M 16
53
48
80
PN 40
8 × M 16
53
48
100
PN 16
8 × M 16
57
51
100
PN 40
8 × M 20
78
70
125
PN 16
8 × M 16
75
67
125
PN 40
8 × M 24
111
99
150
PN 16
8 × M 20
99
85
150
PN 40
8 × M 24
136
120
200
PN 10
8 × M 20
141
101
200
PN 16
12 × M 20
94
67
200
PN 25
12 × M 24
138
105
250
PN 10
12 × M 20
110
–
250
PN 16
12 × M 24
131
–
250
PN 25
12 × M 27
200
–
300
PN 10
12 × M 20
125
–
300
PN 16
12 × M 24
179
–
300
PN 25
16 × M 27
204
–
350
PN 10
16 × M 20
188
–
350
PN 16
16 × M 24
254
–
350
PN 25
16 × M 30
380
–
400
PN 10
16 × M 24
260
–
400
PN 16
16 × M 27
330
–
400
PN 25
16 × M 33
488
–
450
PN 10
20 × M 24
235
–
450
PN 16
20 × M 27
300
–
450
PN 25
20 × M 33
385
–
500
PN 10
20 × M 24
265
–
500
PN 16
20 × M 30
448
–
500
PN 25
20 × M 33
533
–
600
PN 10
20 × M 27
345
–
600 *
PN 16
20 × M 33
658
–
600
PN 25
20 × M 36
731
–
* Designed acc. to EN 1092-1 (not to DIN 2501)
Endress+Hauser
29
Installation
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Promag P tightening torques for ANSI
Nominal diameter
ANSI
Screws
Max. tightening torque
Pressure rating
[mm]
[inch]
[lbs]
15
½"
Class 150
15
½"
Class 300
25
1"
25
1"
40
40
PTFE
PFA
[Nm]
[lbf · ft]
[Nm]
[lbf · ft]
4 × ½"
6
4
–
–
4 × ½"
6
4
–
–
Class 150
4 × ½"
11
8
10
7
Class 300
4 × 5/8"
14
10
12
9
1 ½"
Class 150
4 × ½"
24
18
21
15
1 ½"
Class 300
4 × ¾"
34
25
31
23
50
2"
Class 150
4 × 5/8"
47
35
44
32
50
2"
Class 300
8 × 5/8"
23
17
22
16
80
3"
Class 150
4 × 5/8"
79
58
67
49
80
3"
Class 300
8 × ¾"
47
35
42
31
100
4"
Class 150
8 × 5/8"
56
41
50
37
100
4"
Class 300
8 × ¾"
67
49
59
44
150
6"
Class 150
8 × ¾"
106
78
86
63
150
6"
Class 300
12 × ¾"
73
54
67
49
200
8"
Class 150
8 × ¾"
143
105
109
80
250
10"
Class 150
12 × 7/8"
135
100
–
–
300
12"
Class 150
12 × 7/8"
178
131
–
–
350
14"
Class 150
12 × 1"
260
192
–
–
400
16"
Class 150
16 × 1"
246
181
–
–
450
18"
Class 150
16 × 1 1/8"
371
274
–
–
500
20"
Class 150
20 × 1 1/8"
341
252
–
–
600
24"
Class 150
20 × 1 ¼"
477
352
–
–
Promag P tightening torques for JIS
Nominal diameter
30
JIS
Pressure rating
Screws
[mm]
15
10K
15
25
Max. tightening torque [Nm]
PTFE
PFA
4 × M 12
16
–
20K
4 × M 12
16
–
10K
4 × M 16
32
27
25
20K
4 × M 16
32
27
32
10K
4 × M 16
38
–
32
20K
4 × M 16
38
–
40
10K
4 × M 16
41
37
40
20K
4 × M 16
41
37
50
10K
4 × M 16
54
46
50
20K
8 × M 16
27
23
65
10K
4 × M 16
74
63
65
20K
8 × M 16
37
31
80
10K
8 × M 16
38
32
80
20K
8 × M 20
57
46
100
10K
8 × M 16
47
38
100
20K
8 × M 20
75
58
125
10K
8 × M 20
80
66
125
20K
8 × M 22
121
103
150
10K
8 × M 20
99
81
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Installation
Nominal diameter
JIS
Pressure rating
Screws
150
20K
12 × M 22
200
10K
200
20K
250
250
[mm]
Max. tightening torque [Nm]
PTFE
PFA
108
72
12 × M 20
82
54
12 × M 22
121
88
10K
12 × M 22
133
–
20K
12 × M 24
212
–
300
10K
16 × M 22
99
–
300
20K
16 × M 24
183
–
Promag P tightening torques for AS 2129
Nominal diameter
[mm]
AS 2129
Pressure rating
Screws
Max. tightening torque [Nm]
PTFE
25
Table E
4 × M 12
21
50
Table E
4 × M 16
42
Promag P tightening torques for AS 4087
Endress+Hauser
Nominal diameter
[mm]
AS 4087
Pressure rating
Screws
Max. tightening torque [Nm]
PTFE
50
PN 16
4 × M 16
42
31
Installation
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
3.3.3
Installing the Promag H sensor
The sensor is supplied, as per your order, with or without installed process connections. Installed
process connections are screwed onto the sensor using 4 or 6 hexagonal-headed bolts.
"
Caution!
Depending on the application and the length of the pipe, the sensor must be supported or more
securely mounted if necessary. Particularly when using process connections made of plastic, it is
essential that the sensor be mounted securely. A wall mounting kit for this purpose can be ordered
separately as an accessory from Endress+Hauser → ä 123.
A
C
B
a0004301
Fig. 20:
Promag H process connections; DN 2 to 25 / DN 40 to 100 (1/12" to 1" / 1 ½" to 4")
A = DN 2 to 25 (1/12" to 1") / Process connections with O-ring
Weld nipple (DIN EN ISO 1127, ODT / SMS), flange (EN (DIN), ANSI, JIS), flange made of PVDF (EN (DIN), ANSI, JIS),
external thread, internal thread, hose connection, PVC adhesive fitting
B = DN 2 to 25 (1/12" to 1") / Process connections with aseptic molded seal
Weld nipple (DIN 11850, ODT / SMS), clamp (ISO 2852, DIN 32676, L14 AM7),
coupling (DIN 11851, DIN 11864-1, SMS 1145), flange DIN 11864-2
C = DN 40 to 100 (1 ½" to 4") / Process connections with aseptic molded seal
Weld nipple (DIN 11850, ODT / SMS), clamp (ISO 2852, DIN 32676, L14 AM7),
coupling (DIN 11851, DIN 11864-1, ISO 2853, SMS 1145), flange DIN 11864-2
Seals
When mounting the process connections, please ensure that the relevant seals are clean and
properly centered.
"
32
Caution!
• In the case of metallic process connections, the screws must be fully tightened. The process
connection forms a metallic connection with the sensor, which ensures a defined compression of
the seal.
• In the case of process connections made of plastic, the maximum screw tightening torques for
lubricated threads (7 Nm / 5.2 lbf ft) must be adhered to. In the case of plastic flanges, a seal must
always be used between the connection and the counterflange.
• Depending on the application, the seals should be replaced periodically, particularly when molded
seals (aseptic version) are used!
The interval between replacements depends on the frequency of the cleaning cycles and on the
temperatures of the fluid and the cleaning process. Replacement seals can be ordered as an
accessory at a later stage → ä 123.
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Installation
Using and installing grounding rings (DN 2 to 25, 1/12" to 1")
In case the process connections are made of plastic (e.g. flanges or adhesive fittings), the potential
between the sensor and the fluid must be equalised using additional ground rings.
If the ground rings are not installed this can affect the accuracy of the measurements or cause the
destruction of the sensor through the galvanic corrosion of the electrodes.
"
Caution!
• Depending on the option ordered, plastic rings may be installed at the process connections instead
of ground rings. These plastic rings serve only as spacers and have no potential equalization
function. In addition, they provide a sealing function at the interface between the sensor and
process connection. For this reason, with process connections without ground rings, these plastic
rings/seals must not be removed, or must always be installed.
• Ground rings can be ordered separately from Endress+Hauser as accessories → ä 123.
When placing the order, make certain that the ground ring is compatible with the material used
for the electrodes. Otherwise, there is a risk that the electrodes may be destroyed by galvanic
corrosion! Information about the materials can be found on → ä 165.
• Ground rings, including the seals, are mounted within the process connections. Therefore, the
fitting length is not affected.
1.
Loosen the four or six hexagonal headed bolts (1) and remove the process connection from the
sensor (4).
2.
Remove the plastic ring (3), including the two O-ring seals (2).
3.
Place one seal (2) in the groove of the process connection.
4.
Place the metal ground ring (3) on the process connection.
5.
Now place the second seal (2) in the groove of the ground ring.
6.
Finally, mount the process connection on the sensor again. With plastic process connections,
note the max. torques for lubricated threads (7 Nm / 5.2 lbf ft).
1
2
3
2
4
a0002651
Fig. 21:
Installing grounding rings in the Promag H (DN 2 to 25, 1/12" to 1")
1 = Hexagonal-headed bolts, process connection
2 = O-ring seals
3 = Grounding ring or plastic ring (spacer)
4 = Sensor
Endress+Hauser
33
Installation
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Welding the transmitter into the pipe (weld nipple)
"
!
Caution!
Risk of electronics being destroyed. Please ensure that the welding system is not grounded via the
sensor or transmitter.
1.
Secure the sensor using several welding points in the piping. A welding jig suitable for this
purpose can be ordered separately as an accessory → ä 123.
2.
Loosen the screws at the process connection flange, and remove the sensor incl. seal from the
piping.
3.
Weld the process connection into the pipe.
4.
Mount the sensor back into the pipe. When doing so, make sure that the seal is clean and
positioned correctly.
Note!
• If the welding is done properly with thin-walled food pipes, the seal will not be damaged by heat
even when mounted. Nonetheless, it is recommended that you dismantle the sensor and seal.
• For dismantling purposes, it must be possible to open the piping a total of approx. 8 mm.
Cleaning using pigs
When cleaning using pigs, please note the internal diameters of the measuring tube and the process
connection. All the dimensions and lengths of the sensor and transmitter are provided in the
separate documentation "Technical Information" → ä 170.
34
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Installation
3.3.4
Turning the transmitter housing
Turning the aluminum field housing
#
Warning!
The rotating mechanism in devices with Ex d/de or FM/CSA Cl. I Div. 1 approval is different to
that described here. The relevant procedure is described in the Ex-specific documentation.
1.
Loosen the two securing screws.
2.
Turn the bayonet catch as far as it will go.
3.
Carefully lift the transmitter housing as far as it will go.
4.
Turn the transmitter housing to the desired position (max. 2 × 90° in either direction).
5.
Lower the housing into position and reengage the bayonet catch.
6.
Retighten the two securing screws.
4
2
5
1
3
6
a0004302
Fig. 22:
Turning the transmitter housing (aluminum field housing)
Turning the stainless steel field housing
1.
Loosen the two securing screws.
2.
Carefully lift the transmitter housing as far as it will go.
3.
Turn the transmitter housing to the desired position (max. 2 × 90° in either direction).
4.
Lower the housing into position once more.
5.
Retighten the two securing screws.
3
4
1
2
5
a0004303
Fig. 23:
Endress+Hauser
Turning the transmitter housing (stainless steel field housing)
35
Installation
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
3.3.5
Turning the local display
1.
Unscrew the electronics compartment cover from the transmitter housing.
2.
Press the latches on the side of the display module and pull the module out of the electronics
compartment cover.
3.
Turn the display to the desired position (max. 4 × 45° in both directions) and position it back
on the electronics compartment cover.
4.
Screw the cover of the electronics compartment firmly onto the transmitter housing.
4 x 45°
a0003236
Fig. 24:
36
Turning the local display (field housing)
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Installation
3.3.6
Installing the wall-mount housing
There are various ways of installing the wall-mount housing:
"
• Mounted directly on the wall
• Panel mounting (with separate mounting kit, accessories) → ä 38
• Pipe mounting (with separate mounting kit, accessories) → ä 38
Caution!
• Make sure that the permitted ambient temperature range is observed (see nameplate or
→ ä 155). Install the device in a shady location. Avoid direct sunlight.
• Always install the wall-mount housing in such a way that the cable entries are pointing down.
Mounted directly on the wall
1.
Drill the holes as illustrated.
2.
Remove the cover of the connection compartment (a).
3.
Push the two securing screws (b) through the appropriate bores (c) in the housing.
– Securing screws (M6): max. Ø 6.5 mm (0.24")
– Screw head: max. Ø 10.5 mm (0.4")
4.
Secure the transmitter housing to the wall as indicated.
5.
Screw the cover of the connection compartment (a) firmly onto the housing.
35 (1.38)
b
c
81.5 (3.2)
c
a
90 (3.54)
192 (7.56)
mm (inch)
a0001130-ae
Fig. 25:
Endress+Hauser
Mounted directly on the wall
37
Installation
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Panel mounting
1.
Prepare the opening in the panel as illustrated.
2.
Slide the housing into the opening in the panel from the front.
3.
Screw the fasteners onto the wall-mount housing.
4.
Place the threaded rods in the fasteners and screw them down until
the housing is seated tightly against the panel wall. Afterwards, tighten the locking nuts.
Additional support is not necessary.
210 (8.27)
+0.5 (+0.019)
–0.5 (–0.019)
245 (9.65)
mm (inch)
+0.5 (+0.019)
–0.5 (–0.019)
~110 (~4.33)
a0001131
Fig. 26:
Panel mounting (wall-mount housing)
Pipe mounting
The assembly should be performed by following the instructions in the following diagram.
"
Caution!
If the device is mounted to a warm pipe, make sure that the housing temperature does not exceed
+60 °C (+140 °F), which is the maximum permissible temperature.
Ø 20…70
(Ø 0.79…2.75)
~155 (~ 6.1)
mm (inch)
a0001132
Fig. 27:
38
Pipe mounting (wall-mount housing)
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Installation
3.4
Post-installation check
Perform the following checks after installing the measuring device in the pipe:
Endress+Hauser
Device condition/specifications
Notes
Is the device damaged (visual inspection)?
-
Does the device correspond to specifications at the measuring point, including
process temperature and pressure, ambient temperature, minimum fluid
conductivity, measuring range, etc.?
→ ä 152
Installation
Notes
Does the arrow on the sensor nameplate match the direction of flow through the
pipe?
-
Is the position of the measuring electrode plane correct?
→ ä 15
Is the position of the empty pipe detection electrode correct?
→ ä 15
Were all screws tightened to the specified tightening torques when the sensor was
installed?
→ ä 21
Were the correct seals installed (type, material, installation)?
→ ä 21
Are the measuring point number and labeling correct (visual inspection)?
-
Process environment / process conditions
Notes
Are the inlet and outlet runs respected?
Inlet run ≥ 5 × DN
Outlet run ≥ 2 × DN
Is the measuring device protected against moisture and direct sunlight?
-
Is the sensor adequately protected against vibration (attachment, support)?
Acceleration up to 2 g in
accordance with
IEC 600 68-2-6 → ä 155
39
Wiring
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
4
#
!
Wiring
Warning!
When connecting Ex-certified devices, see the notes and diagrams in the Ex-specific supplement to
this Operating Manual. Please do not hesitate to contact your Endress+Hauser sales office if you
have any questions.
Note!
The device does not have an internal power switch. For this reason, assign the device a switch or
power-circuit breaker which can be used to disconnect the power supply line from the power grid.
4.1
4.1.1
PROFIBUS cable specifications
PROFIBUS DP cable specification
Cable type
Two versions of the bus line are specified in IEC 61158. Cable type A can be used for all
transmission rates up to 12 Mbit/s. Please refer to the table for the cable parameters:
Cable type A
Characteristic impedance
135 to 165 Ω at a measuring frequency of 3 to 20 MHz
Cable capacitance
< 30 pF/m
Core cross-section
>0.34 mm2, corresponds to AWG 22
Cable type
Twisted in pairs, 1 x 2, 2 x 2 or 1 x 4 wire
Loop-resistance
110 Ω/km
Signal damping
Max. 9 dB over the entire length of the cable section
Shielding
Copper braided shielding or braided shielding and foil shielding
Bus structure
Note the following points:
• The maximum line length (segment length) depends on the transmission rate.
For cable type A, the maximum line length (segment length) is as follows:
Transmission rate [kBit/s]
9.6 to 93.75
187.5
500
1500
3000 to 12000
Line length [m] ([inch])
1200 (4000)
1 000 (3300)
400 (1300)
200(650)
100(330)
• A maximum of 32 users are permitted per segment.
• Each segment is terminated at either end with a terminating resistor.
• The bus length or the number of users can be increased by introducing a repeater.
• The first and last segment can comprise max. 31 devices.
The segments between the repeaters can comprise max. 30 stations.
• The maximum distance between two bus users can be calculated as follows: (NO_REP + 1) x
segment length
!
Note!
NO_REP = maximum number of repeaters that may be switched in series depending on the
repeater in question.
Example
In accordance with manufacturer specifications, 9 repeaters can be switched in series when using
a standard line. The maximum distance between two bus users at a transmission rate of
1.5 MBit/s can be calculated as follows: (9 + 1) x 200 m = 2000 m
40
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Wiring
Spurs
Note the following points:
• Length of spurs < 6.6 m (21.7 ft) (at max.1.5 MBit/s)
• No spurs should be used for transmission rates >1.5 MBit/s. The line between the connector and
the bus driver is described as a spur. Experience has shown that you should proceed with caution
when configuring spurs. For this reason, you cannot assume that the sum of all spurs at
1.5 MBit/s will be 6.6 m (21.7 ft). This is affected greatly by the arrangement of the field devices.
Therefore, we recommend that if possible, you do not use any spurs at transmission rates
>1.5 MBit/s.
• If you cannot avoid using spurs, then they may not include any bus terminators.
Bus termination
It is important to terminate the RS485 line correctly at the start and end of the bus segment, since
impedance mismatch results in reflections on the line which can cause faulty data
transmission.→ ä 74
Further information
General information and further notes regarding the wiring are contained in BA034S/04:
"Guidelines for planning and commissioning, PROFIBUS DP/PA, field communication."
4.1.2
PROFIBUS PA cable specification
Cable type
Twin-core cables are recommended for connecting the device to the fieldbus. Following IEC
61158-2 (MBP), four different cable types (A, B, C, D) can be used with the fieldbus, only two of
which (cable types A and B) are shielded.
• Cable types A or B are particularly preferable for new installations. Only these types have cable
shielding that guarantees adequate protection from electromagnetic interference and thus the
most reliable data transfer. In the case of type B multi-pair cables, multiple fieldbuses with the
same degree of protection may be operated on one cable. No other circuits are permissible in the
same cable.
• Practical experience has shown that cable types C and D should not be used due to the lack of
shielding, since the freedom from interference generally does not meet the requirements
described in the standard.
The electrical data of the fieldbus cable have not been specified but determine important
characteristics of the design of the fieldbus, such as distances bridged, number of users,
electromagnetic compatibility etc.
Type A
Type B
Cable structure
Twisted pair,
shielded
One or more twisted pairs, fully shielded
Wire cross-section
0.8 mm2 (AWG 18)
0.32 mm2 (AWG 22)
Loop-resistance (DC)
44 Ω/km
112 Ω/km
Characteristic impedance at 31.25 kHz
100 Ω ± 20%
100 Ω ± 30%
Attenuation constant at 39 kHz
3 dB/km
5 dB/km
Capacitive asymmetry
2 nF/km
2 nF/km
Envelope delay distortion (7.9 to 39 kHz)
1.7 μs/km
*
Shield coverage
90%
*
Max. cable length (incl. spurs >1 m (> 3 ft)) 1900 m (6200 ft)
1200 m (4000 ft)
* Not specified
Endress+Hauser
41
Wiring
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Suitable fieldbus cables from various manufacturers for non-hazardous areas are listed below:
• Siemens: 6XV1 830-5BH10
• Belden: 3076F
• Kerpen: CeL-PE/OSCR/PVC/FRLA FB-02YS(ST)YFL
Maximum overall cable length
The maximum network expansion depends on the type of explosion protection and the cable
specifications. The overall cable length combines the length of the main cable and the length of all
spurs >1 m (>3 ft).
Note the following points:
• The maximum permissible overall cable length depends on the cable type used:
Type A
1900 m
6200 ft
Type B
1200 m
4000 ft
• If repeaters are used, the maximum permissible cable length is doubled.
A maximum of three repeaters are permitted between user and master.
Maximum spur length
The line between the distribution box and field device is described as a spur.
In the case of non-Ex applications, the max. length of a spur depends on the number of
spurs (>1 m):
Number of spurs
1 to 12
13 to 14
15 to 18
19 to 24
25 to 32
[m]
120
90
60
30
1
[ft]
400
300
200
100
3
Max. length per spur
Number of field devices
In systems that meet FISCO with EEx ia type of protection, the line length is limited to
max. 1000 m (3280 in) . A maximum of 32 users per segment in non-Ex areas or a maximum of
10 users in an Ex-area (EEx ia IIC) is possible. The actual number of users must be determined
during configuration.
Bus termination
The start and end of each fieldbus segment are always to be terminated with a bus terminator. With
various junction boxes (non-Ex), the bus termination can be activated via a switch. If this is not the
case, a separate bus terminator must be installed.
Note the following points:
• In the case of a branched bus segment, the device furthest from the segment coupler represents
the end of the bus.
• If the fieldbus is extended with a repeater then the extension must also be terminated at both
ends.
Further information
General information and further notes regarding the wiring are contained in BA034S/04:
"Guidelines for planning and commissioning, PROFIBUS DP/PA, field communication."
42
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Wiring
4.1.3
Shielding and grounding
When planning the shielding and grounding for a fieldbus system, there are three important points
to consider:
• Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
• Explosion protection
• Safety of the personnel
To ensure the optimum electromagnetic compatibility of systems, it is important that the system
components and above all the cables, which connect the components, are shielded and that no
portion of the system is unshielded. Ideally, the cable shields are connected to the normally metal
housings of the connected field devices. Since these are generally connected to the protective
ground, the shield of the bus cable is grounded many times. Keep the stripped and twisted lengths
of cable shield to the terminals as short as possible.
This approach, which provides the best electromagnetic compatibility and personal safety, can be
used without restriction in systems with good potential matching.
In the case of systems without potential matching, a power supply frequency (50 Hz) equalizing
current can flow between two grounding points which, in unfavorable cases, e.g. when it exceeds
the permissible shield current, may destroy the cable.
To suppress the low frequency equalizing currents on systems without potential matching, it is
therefore recommended to connect the cable shield directly to the building ground (or protective
ground) at one end only and to use capacitive coupling to connect all other grounding points.
"
Endress+Hauser
Caution!
The legal EMC requirements are fulfilled only when the cable shield is grounded on both sides!
43
Wiring
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
#
"
4.2
Connecting the remote version
4.2.1
Connecting Promag W/P/H
Warning!
• Risk of electric shock! Switch off the power supply before opening the device. Do not install or
wire the device while it is connected to the power supply. Failure to comply with this precaution
can result in irreparable damage to the electronics.
• Risk of electric shock! Connect the protective conductor to the ground terminal on the housing
before the power supply is applied.
Caution!
• Only sensors and transmitters with the same serial number can be connected to one another.
Communication problems can occur if the devices are not connected in this way.
• Risk of damaging the coil driver. Always switch off the power supply before connecting or
disconnecting the coil cable.
Procedure
1.
Transmitter: Remove the cover from the connection compartment (a).
2.
Sensor: Remove the cover from the connection housing (b).
3.
Feed the signal cable (c) and coil current cable (d) through the appropriate cable entries.
"
Caution!
Secure the connecting cable (see "Length of connecting cable" → ä 20).
4.
Terminate the signal and coil current cable in accordance with the table:
Promag W, Promag P → Please see the "Cable termination" table → ä 46
Promag H → Please see the "Cable termination" table → ä 47
5.
Set up the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
The wiring diagram applicable to your device can be found:
• in the relevant diagram:
→ å 28 (Promag W, Promag P); → å 29 (Promag H)
• in the cover of the sensor and transmitter.
!
Note!
The cable shields of the Promag H sensor are grounded using strain relief clamps (please see
the "Cable termination" table → ä 47).
"
Caution!
Insulate the cable shields that are not connected. This eliminates the risk of short-circuits with
neighboring cable shields inside the connection housing.
44
6.
Transmitter: Secure the cover on the connection compartment (a).
7.
Sensor: Mount the cover on the connection housing (b).
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Wiring
Promag W, P
8
4 37 36
S
GND
7
E
5
E2
6
d
S2
S1
E1
c
42 41
a
c
d
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
7
4 37
E1
GND
42 41
E
5
E2
b
A0011722
Fig. 28:
a
b
c
d
n.c.
Connecting the remote version of Promag W, P
Wall-mount housing connection compartment
Cover of the sensor connection housing
Signal cable
Coil current cable
Not connected, insulated cable shields
Wire colors/Terminal No.:
5/6 = brown, 7/8 = white, 4 = green, 37/36 = yellow
Promag H
7
8
4 37 36
S
S2
GND
5
E
E1
6
d
E2
S1
c
42 41
a
c
d
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
7
4 37
E2
GND
42 41
E
5
E1
b
A0011747
Fig. 29:
a
b
c
d
n.c.
Connecting the remote version of Promag H
Wall-mount housing connection compartment
Cover of the sensor connection housing
Signal cable
Coil current cable
Not connected, insulated cable shields
Wire colors/Terminal No.:
5/6 = brown, 7/8 = white, 4 = green, 37/36 = yellow
Endress+Hauser
45
Wiring
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Cable termination in remote version
Promag W, Promag P
Terminate the signal and coil current cables as shown in the figure below (Detail A).
Fit the fine-wire cores with wire end ferrules (detail B: m = red ferrules, Ø 1.0 mm; n = white ferrules, Ø 0.5 mm)
* Stripping for reinforced cables only
"
Caution!
When fitting the connectors, pay attention to the following points:
• Signal cable → Make sure that the wire end ferrules do not touch the wire shields on the sensor side!
Minimum distance = 1 mm (exception "GND" = green cable)
• Coil current cable → Insulate one core of the three-core wire at the level of the core reinforcement; you only require two cores for the connection.
TRANSMITTER
Signal cable
Coil current cable
mm (inch)
100 (3.94)*
mm (inch)
90 (3.54)*
80 (3.15)
17 (0.67)
8 (0.31)
70 (2.76)
50 (1.97)
8 (0.31)
50 (1.97)
10 (0.39)
A
A
m
m
n
m
n
m
n
m
m
m
GND
n
B
B
A0002687-ae
A0002688-ae
SENSOR
Signal cable
Coil current cable
20 (0.79)*
170 (6.69)*
80 (3.15)
17 (0.67)
50 (1.97)
8 (0.31)
mm (inch)
20 (0.79)*
160 (6.30)*
mm (inch)
70 (2.76)
50 (1.97)
10 (0.39)
8 (0.31)
A
A
m
n
m
³1 (0.04)
m
n
GND
n
B
B
m
A0002646-AE
46
m
A0002650-ae
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Wiring
Cable termination in remote version
Promag H
Terminate the signal and coil current cables as shown in the figure below (Detail A).
Fit the fine-wire cores with wire end ferrules (detail B: m = ferrules red, Ø 1.0 mm; n = ferrule white, Ø 0.5 mm)
"
Caution!
When fitting the connectors, pay attention to the following points:
• Signal cable → Make sure that the wire end ferrules do not touch the wire shields on the sensor side!
Minimum distance = 1 mm (exception "GND" = green cable)
• Coil current cable → Insulate one core of the three-core wire at the level of the core reinforcement; you only require two cores for the connection.
• On the sensor side, reverse both cable shields approx. 15 mm over the outer jacket. The strain relief ensures an electrical connection with the connection
housing.
TRANSMITTER
Signal cable
Coil current cable
mm (inch)
80 (3.15)
17 (0.67)
70 (2.76)
mm (inch)
50 (1.97)
50 (1.97)
8 (0.31)
10 (0.39)
8 (0.31)
A
A
m
m
n
m
n
m
n
m
m
m
GND
n
B
B
A0002686-ae
A0002684-ae
SENSOR
Signal cable
Coil current cable
80 (3.15)
70 (2.76)
15 (0.59)
17 (0.67)
8 (0.31)
15 (0.59)
40 (1.57)
8 (0.31)
A
A
1 (0.04)
n
B
m
n
GND
m
n
m
B
mm (inch)
A0002647-ae
Endress+Hauser
mm (inch)
A0002648-ae
47
Wiring
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
4.2.2
Cable specifications
Signal cable
• 3 × 0.38 mm² PVC cable with common, braided copper shield (∅ ∼ 7 mm) and individually
shielded cores
• With Empty Pipe Detection (EPD): 4 × 0.38 mm² PVC cable with common, braided copper shield
(∅ ∼ 7 mm) and individually shielded cores
• Conductor resistance: ≤ 50 Ω/km
• Capacitance: core/shield: ≤ 420 pF/m
• Operating temperature: –20 to +80 °C
• Conductor cross-section: max. 2.5 mm²
Coil cable
• 2 × 0.75 mm² PVC cable with common, braided copper shield (Ø ∼ 7 mm)
• Conductor resistance: ≤ 37 Ω/km
• Capacitance: core/core, shield grounded: ≤ 120 pF/m
• Operating temperature: –20 to +80 °C
• Conductor cross-section: max. 2.5 mm²
• Test current for cable insulation: ≥1433 V AC rms 50/60 Hz or ≥2026 V DC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
a
b
A0003194
Fig. 30:
a
b
Cable cross-section
Signal cable
Coil current cable
1 = Core, 2 = Core insulation, 3 = Core shield, 4 = Core jacket, 5 = Core reinforcement, 6 = Cable shield,
7 = Outer jacket
Reinforced connecting cables
As an option, Endress+Hauser can also deliver reinforced connecting cables with an additional,
reinforcing metal braid.
We recommend such cables for the following cases:
• Directly buried cable
• Cables endangered by rodents
• Device operation which should comply with the IP 68 (NEMA 6P) standard of protection
Operation in zones of severe electrical interference
The measuring device complies with the general safety requirements in accordance with EN 61010
and the EMC requirements of IEC/EN 61326.
"
48
Caution!
Grounding is by means of the ground terminals provided for the purpose inside the connection
housing. Keep the stripped and twisted lengths of cable shield to the terminals as short as possible.
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
!
Wiring
4.3
Connecting the measuring unit
4.3.1
Terminal assignment
Note!
The electrical characteristic quantities are listed in the "Technical data" section.
PROFIBUS DP
"
Caution!
Only certain combinations of submodules (see Table) on the I/O board are permissible. The
individual slots are also marked and assigned to the following terminals in the connection
compartment of the transmitter:
• "INPUT / OUTPUT 3" slot = terminals 22/23
• "INPUT / OUTPUT 4" slot = terminals 20/21
Terminal No. (inputs/outputs)
Order version
20 (+) / 21 (-)
Submodule on
slot No. 4
22 (+) / 23 (-)
Submodule on
slot No. 3
24 (+) / 25 (-)
Fixed on
I/O board
26 = B (RxD/TxD-P)
27 = A (RxD/TxD-N)
Fixed on I/O board
53***-***********J
-
-
+5V(ext. termination)
PROFIBUS DP
53***-***********V
Relay output 2
Relay output 1
Status input
PROFIBUS DP
53***-***********P
Current output
Frequency output
Status input
PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS PA
Terminal No. (inputs/outputs)
Order version
20 (+) / 21 (-)
22 (+) / 23 (-)
24 (+) / 25 (-)
26 = PA + 1)
27 = PA - 1)
53***-***********F
-
-
-
PROFIBUS PA, Ex i
53***-***********H
-
-
-
PROFIBUS PA
1)With
Endress+Hauser
integrated reverse polarity protection
49
Wiring
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
4.3.2
#
Transmitter connection
Warning!
• Risk of electric shock. Switch off the power supply before opening the device. Do not install or
wire the device while it is connected to the power supply. Failure to comply with this precaution
can result in irreparable damage to parts of the electronics.
• Risk of electric shock. Connect the protective ground to the ground terminal on the housing
before the power supply is applied (not required for galvanically isolated power supply).
• Compare the specifications on the nameplate with the local supply voltage and frequency. The
national regulations governing the installation of electrical equipment also apply.
1.
Unscrew the connection compartment cover (a) from the transmitter housing.
2.
Feed the power supply cable (b), the signal cable (d) and the fieldbus cable (e) through the
appropriate cable entries.
3.
Perform wiring in accordance with the respective terminal assignment and the associated
wiring diagram.
"
Caution!
– Risk of damage to the fieldbus cable!
Observe the information about shielding and grounding the fieldbus cable. → ä 43
– We recommend that the fieldbus cable not be looped using conventional cable glands. If you
later replace even just one measuring device, the bus communication will have to be
interrupted.
4.
50
Screw the cover of the connection compartment (a) back onto the transmitter housing.
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Wiring
4.3.3
PROFIBUS DP connection diagram
Permanent assignment board (order version 53***-***********J)
d
g
A
b
C
a
d
g
B
a
b
b
g
d
+5 V
DGND
B (RxD/TxD-P)
A (RxD/TxD-N)
N (L–)
L1 (L+)
A (RxD/TxD-N)
B (RxD/TxD-P)
DGND
+5 V
f
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
N (L-) 2
L1 (L+) 1
d
f
e
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
1 2
g
c
b
b
c
g
e
d
a0002308
Fig. 31:
A
B
C
View A (field housing)
View B (stainless steel field housing)
View C (wall-mount housing)
a
b
Connection compartment cover
Cable for power supply: 85 to 260 V AC, 20 to 55 V AC, 16 to 62 V DC
Terminal No. 1: L1 for AC, L+ for DC
Terminal No. 2: N for AC, L- for DC
Ground terminal for protective conductor
Fieldbus cable
Terminal No. 26: B (RxD/TxD-P)
Terminal No. 27: A (RxD/TxD-N)
Ground terminal for fieldbus cable shield
Observe the following:
– the shielding and grounding of the fieldbus cable → ä 43
– that the stripped and twisted lengths of cable shield to the ground terminal are as short as possible
Service adapter for connecting service interface FXA193 (Fieldcheck, FieldCare)
Cable for external termination:
Terminal No. 24: +5 V
Terminal No. 25: DGND
c
d
e
f
g
Endress+Hauser
Connecting the transmitter, cable cross-section: max. 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG)
51
Wiring
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Flexible assignment boards (order version 53***-***********V and
53***-***********P)
d
g
A
b
C
a
d
g
B
a
b
A (RxD/TxD-N)
B (RxD/TxD-P)
–
+
f
–
+
–
+
b
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
N (L-) 2
L1 (L+) 1
g
d
N (L–)
B (RxD/TxD-P)
L1 (L+)
A (RxD/TxD-N)
d
+ – + – + –
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
1 2
f
e
g
c
b
b
c
g
e
d
a0002591
Fig. 32:
A
B
C
View A (field housing)
View B (stainless steel field housing)
View C (wall-mount housing)
a
b
Connection compartment cover
Cable for power supply: 85 to 260 V AC, 20 to 55 V AC, 16 to 62 V DC
Terminal No. 1: L1 for AC, L+ for DC
Terminal No. 2: N for AC, L- for DC
Ground terminal for protective conductor
Fieldbus cable
Terminal No. 26: B (RxD/TxD-P)
Terminal No. 27: A (RxD/TxD-N)
Ground terminal for signal cable shield/fieldbus cable shield
Observe the following:
– the shielding and grounding of the fieldbus cable → ä 43
– that the stripped and twisted lengths of cable shield to the ground terminal are as short as possible
Service adapter for connecting service interface FXA193 (Fieldcheck, FieldCare)
Signal cable: see Terminal assignment → ä 49
c
d
e
f
g
52
Connecting the transmitter, cable cross-section: max. 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG)
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Wiring
4.3.4
PROFIBUS PA connection diagram
Permanent assignment boards (order version 53***-***********F and
53***-***********H)
d
A
b
C
a
d
B
b
a
b
PA – 27
PA + 26
f
d
N (L–)
L1 (L+)
25
24
23
22
21
20
d
N (L-) 2
L1 (L+) 1
c
PA +
PA –
f
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
1 2
e
b
b
c
e
d
a0002593
Fig. 33:
A
B
C
View A (field housing)
View B (stainless steel field housing)
View C (wall-mount housing)
a
b
Connection compartment cover
Cable for power supply: 85 to 260 V AC, 20 to 55 V AC, 16 to 62 V DC
Terminal No. 1: L1 for AC, L+ for DC
Terminal No. 2: N for AC, L- for DC
Ground terminal for protective conductor
Fieldbus cable:
Terminal No. 26: PA + (with reverse polarity protection)
Terminal No. 27: PA - (with reverse polarity protection)
Ground terminal for fieldbus cable shield
Observe the following:
– the shielding and grounding of the fieldbus cable → ä 43
– that the stripped and twisted lengths of cable shield to the ground terminal are as short as possible
Service adapter for connecting service interface FXA193 (Fieldcheck, FieldCare)
c
d
e
f
Endress+Hauser
Connecting the transmitter, cable cross-section: max. 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG)
53
Wiring
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Fieldbus connector
!
Note!
The connector can only be used for PROFIBUS PA devices.
The connection technology of PROFIBUS PA allows measuring devices to be connected to the
fieldbus via uniform mechanical connections such as T-boxes, distribution modules etc.
This connection technology, which uses prefabricated distribution modules and plug-in connectors,
offers substantial advantages over conventional wiring:
• Field devices can be removed, replaced or added at any time during normal operation.
Communication is not interrupted.
• Installation and maintenance are significantly easier.
• Existing cable infrastructures can be used and expanded instantly, e.g. when constructing new
star distributors using 4-channel or 8-channel distribution modules.
The device can therefore be supplied with the option of a ready-mounted fieldbus connector.
Fieldbus connectors for retrofitting can be ordered from Endress+Hauser as a spare part → ä 123.
A
B
C
D
E
Esc
-
+
E
E
D
C
4
F
45.0 (1.77)
150/300
(5.91/11.81)
3
3
G
4
5
1
2
7
M 12 x 1
PG 13.5
1
2
6
mm (inch)
A0005999
Fig. 34:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Connectors for connecting to the PROFIBUS PA
Aluminum field housing
Stainless steel field housing
Protection cap for connector
Fieldbus connector
Adapter PG 13.5 / M 20.5
Connector at housing (male)
Female connector
Pin assignment/color codes:
1
Brown wire: PA + (terminal 26)
2
Not connected
3
Blue wire: PA - (terminal 27)
4
Black wire: ground (instructions for connection → ä 51)
5
Middle female connector not assigned
6
Positioning groove
7
Positioning key
54
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Wiring
Technical data (fieldbus connector)
Connection cross section
0.75 mm2 (19 AWG )
Connector thread
PG 13.5
Degree of protection
IP 67 in accordance with DIN 40 050 IEC 529
Contact surface
CuZnAu
Housing material
Cu Zn, surface Ni
Flammability
V - 2 in accordance with UL - 94
Operating temperature
–40 to +85 °C, (–40 to +185 °F)
Ambient temperature
–40 to +150 °C, (–40 to +302 °F)
Nominal current per
contact
3A
Nominal voltage
125 to 150 V DC in accordance with the VDE Standard 01 10/ISO Group 10
Resistance to tracking
KC 600
Volume resistance
≤ 8 mΩ in accordance with IEC 512 Part 2
Insulation resistance
≤ 1012 Ω in accordance with IEC 512 Part 2
Shielding of the supply line/T-box
Use cable glands with good EMC properties, with surrounding contact of the cable gland (iris
spring). This requires small differences in potential, and possibly potential matching.
• Do not interrupt the shielding of the PA cable.
• Always keep the connection of the shielding as short as possible.
Ideally, cable glands with iris springs should be used for the connection of the shielding. The shield
is placed on the T-box via the iris spring that is inside the cable gland. The shielding mesh is located
under the iris spring. When the PG thread is screwed closed, the iris spring is pressed onto the
shield, making a conductive connection between the shielding and the metal housing.
A junction box or connection is to be considered part of the shielding (Faraday cage). This is
particularly true for offset boxes when these are connected to a PROFIBUS PA measuring device
using a plug-in cable. In such a case, use a metallic plug in which the cable shielding is attached to
the plug housing (such as prefabricated cables).
Endress+Hauser
55
Wiring
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
4.4
#
Potential matching
Warning!
The measuring system must be included in potential equalization.
Perfect measurement is only ensured when the medium and the sensor have the same electrical
potential. Most Promag sensors have a reference electrode installed as standard, which guarantees
the required potential equalization.
The following must also be taken into account for potential equalization:
• Company-internal grounding guidelines
• Operating conditions such as material/grounding of piping etc. (see table)
4.4.1
Potential equalization, Promag W, Promag P
Reference electrode available as standard
4.4.2
Potential equalization, Promag H
No reference electrode available!
There is always one electrical connection to the fluid via the metallic process connection.
"
Caution!
When using process connections made of plastic, potential equalization must be guaranteed through
the use of grounding rings → ä 33.
The necessary grounding rings may be ordered separately as an accessory from Endress+Hauser
(→ ä 123).
4.4.3
Connection examples for potential equalization
Standard case
Operating conditions
Potential equalization
When using the measuring device in:
• metallic, grounded piping
Potential equalization is carried out via the ground terminal of
the transmitter.
!
Note!
For installation in metal pipes, it is advisable to connect the
ground terminal of the transmitter housing to the piping.
A0011892
Fig. 35:
56
Via the transmitter's ground terminal
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Wiring
Special cases
Operating conditions
Potential equalization
When using the measuring device in:
• metallic, ungrounded piping
This type of connection occurs when:
• the usual potential equalization cannot be guaranteed
• extremely high equalizing currents are expected
A ground cable (copper wire, at least 6 mm² (0.0093 in2)) is used
to connect both sensor flanges to the respective pipe flange and
ground them. Connect the transmitter or sensor connection
housing, as applicable, to ground potential by means of the
ground terminal provided for the purpose.
DN 300
The installation of the ground cable depends on the nominal
diameter:
• DN ≤ 300 (12"): The ground cable is in direct connection
with the conductive flange coating and is secured by the
flange screws.
• DN ≥ 350 (14"): The ground cable connects directly to the
metal transport bracket.
!
Note!
The ground cable for flange-to-flange connections can be
ordered separately as an accessory from Endress+Hauser.
DN 350
A0011893
Fig. 36:
Via the transmitter's ground terminal
and the pipe flanges
Fig. 37:
Via the transmitter's ground terminal
and the optionally available ground
disks
When using the measuring device in:
• Plastic pipes
• Isolating lined pipes
This type of connection occurs when:
• the usual potential equalization cannot be guaranteed
• extremely high equalizing currents are expected
Potential equalization takes place using additional ground disks,
which are connected to the ground terminal via a ground cable
(copper wire, min. 6 mm² (0.0093 in2)). When installing the
ground disks, please comply with the enclosed Installation
Instructions.
A0011895
When using the measuring device in:
• pipes with cathodic protection
1
The device is installed in the pipeline in such a way that it is
potential-free.
Using a ground cable (copper wire, min. 6 mm² (0.0093 in2)),
only the two pipe flanges are connected. When doing so, the
ground cable is mounted directly on the conductive flange
coating using flange screws.
Please note the following during installation:
• The relevant regulations for potential-free installations must
be observed.
• There must not be an electrically conductive connection
between the piping and the device.
• The mounting material must be able to withstand the relevant
torques.
Endress+Hauser
2
2
A0011896
Fig. 38:
1
2
Potential equalization and cathodic
protection
Isolation transformer power supply
Electrically isolated
57
Wiring
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
4.5
Degree of protection
The devices fulfill all the requirements for IP 67 (NEMA 4X).
Compliance with the following points is mandatory following installation in the field or servicing,
in order to ensure that IP 67 protection (NEMA 4X) is maintained:
• The housing seals must be clean and undamaged when inserted into their grooves. The seals must
be dried, cleaned or replaced if necessary.
• All housing screws and screw covers must be firmly tightened.
• The cables used for connection must be of the specified external diameter → ä 153.
• Tighten cable glands to prevent leakages.
• The cables must loop down before they enter the cable entries ("water trap"). This arrangement
prevents moisture penetrating the entry. Always install the measuring device in such a way that
the cable entries do not point up.
• Close off unused cable entries using suitable insert plugs.
• Do not remove the grommet from the cable entry.
a
b
a0001914
Fig. 39:
"
!
58
Installation instructions, cable entries
Caution!
Do not loosen the screws of the sensor housing as otherwise the degree of protection guaranteed by
Endress+Hauser no longer applies.
Note!
The sensor can also be supplied with IP 68 rating (permanent immersion in water to a depth of
3 meters (10 ft). In this case the transmitter must be installed remote from the sensor.
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Wiring
4.6
Post-connection check
Perform the following checks after completing electrical installation of the measuring device:
Endress+Hauser
Device condition and specifications
Notes
Are cables or the device damaged (visual inspection)?
-
Electrical connection
Notes
Does the supply voltage match the specifications on the nameplate?
85 to 260 V AC (45 to 65 Hz)
20 to 55 V AC (45 to 65 Hz)
16 to 62 V DC
Do the cables comply with the specifications?
PROFIBUS DP → ä 40
PROFIBUS PA→ ä 41
Sensor cable → ä 48
Do the cables have adequate strain relief?
-
Cables correctly segregated by type?
Without loops and crossovers?
-
Are the power supply and signal cables correctly connected?
See the wiring diagram inside
the cover of the connection
compartment
Are all screw terminals firmly tightened?
-
Have the measures for grounding and potential matching been correctly
implemented?
→ ä 56
Are all cable entries installed, firmly tightened and correctly sealed?
Cables looped as "water traps"?
→ ä 58
Are all housing covers installed and firmly tightened?
-
Electrical connection of PROFIBUS DP/PA
Notes
Are all the connecting components (T-boxes, junction boxes, connectors, etc.)
connected to each other correctly?
-
Has each fieldbus segment been terminated at both ends with a bus terminator?
PROFIBUS DP → ä 74
Has the max. length of the fieldbus cable been observed in accordance with the
PROFIBUS specifications?
PROFIBUS DP → ä 40
PROFIBUS PA→ ä 42
Has the max. length of the spurs been observed in accordance with the PROFIBUS
specifications?
PROFIBUS DP → ä 41
PROFIBUS PA→ ä 42
Is the fieldbus cable fully shielded and correctly grounded?
→ ä 43
59
Operation
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
5
Operation
5.1
Quick operation guide
The user has a number of options for configuring and commissioning the device:
1.
Local display (option) → ä 61
The local display enables you to read all important variables directly at the measuring point,
configure device-specific parameters in the field and perform commissioning.
2.
Configuration programs → ä 69
The configuration of profile and device-specific parameters is primarily done via the PROFIBUS
interface. You can obtain special configuration and operating programs from various
manufacturers for these purposes.
3.
Jumpers/miniature switches for hardware settings
– PROFIBUS DP → ä 72
– PROFIBUS PA → ä 77
You can make the following hardware settings using a jumper or miniature switches on the
I/O board:
• Address mode configuration (select software or hardware addressing)
• Device bus address configuration (for hardware addressing)
• Hardware write protection enabling/disabling
!
Note!
A description of the configuration of the current output (active/passive) and the relay output
(NC contact/NO contact) is contained in the "Hardware settings" section → ä 75.
2B
2A
FXA193
Esc
-
Esc
-
+
+
E
E
3
1
XXX.XXX.XX
Esc
-
+
E
a0001318
Fig. 40:
1
2A
2B
3
60
Methods of operating PROFIBUS PA/DP
Local display for device operation in the field (option)
Configuration/operating programs (e.g. FieldCare) for operation via PROFIBUS DP/PA
Configuration/operating program for operating by means of the FXA193 service interface (e.g. FieldCare)
Jumper/miniature switches for hardware settings (write protection, device address, address mode)
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Operation
5.2
Local display
5.2.1
Display and operating elements
The local display enables you to read all important parameters directly at the measuring point and
configure the device using the "Quick Setup" or the function matrix.
The display consists of four lines; this is where measured values and/or status variables (direction
of flow, empty pipe, bar graph, etc.) are displayed. You can change the assignment of display lines
to different variables to suit your needs and preferences (→ see the "Description of Device
Functions" manual).
v
1
TOT3
OK
+24.502
x
+1863.97 x
v
–50
y
y
%
+50
Esc
+
-
E
2
3
4
a0004754
Fig. 41:
1
2
3
4
Endress+Hauser
Display and operating elements
Liquid crystal display
The backlit, four-line liquid crystal display shows measured values, dialog texts, fault messages and notice
messages. The display as it appears when normal measuring is in progress is known as the HOME position
(operating mode).
Display
Optical sensors for Touch Control
O/ S keys
– HOME position → Direct access to totalizer values and actual values of inputs/outputs
– Enter numerical values, select parameters
– Select different blocks, groups and function groups within the function matrix
Press the X keys simultaneously to trigger the following functions:
– Exit the function matrix step by step → HOME position
– Press and hold down X keys for longer than 3 seconds → Return directly to the HOME position
– Cancel data entry
F key (Enter key)
– HOME position → Entry into the function matrix
– Save the numerical values you input or settings you change
61
Operation
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
5.2.2
Display (operating mode)
The display area consists of three lines in all; this is where measured values are displayed, and/or
status variables (direction of flow, bar graph, etc.). You can change the assignment of display lines
to different variables to suit your needs and preferences (→ see the "Description of Device
Functions" manual).
Multiplex mode:
A maximum of two different display variables can be assigned to each line. Variables multiplexed in
this way alternate every 10 seconds on the display.
Error messages:
Display and presentation of system/process errors → ä 68
4
5
+24.502
v
TOT3
OK
6
x
+1863.97 x
v
–50
1
y
y
+50
2
%
3
a0004755
Fig. 42:
1
2
3
4
5
6
Typical display for normal operating mode (HOME position)
Main display line: shows primary measured values, e.g. mass flow in [kg/h]
Additional line: shows measured variables and status variables, e.g. totalizer No. 3 in [t]
Information line: shows additional information on the measured variables and status variables,
e.g. bar graph display of the full scale value achieved by the mass flow
"Info icons" field: icons representing additional information on the measured values are shown in this field.
→ ä 63
"Measured values" field: the current measured values appear in this field
"Unit of measure" field: the units of measure and time defined for the current measured values appear in this field
5.2.3
Additional display functions
Depending on the order option (F-CHIP → ä 121), the local display has different display functions:
Device without batching software:
From HOME position, use the OS keys to open an "Info Menu" containing the following
information:
• Totalizer (including overflow)
• Actual values or states of the configured inputs/outputs
• Device TAG number (user-definable)
OS → Scan of individual values within the Info Menu
X (Esc key) → Back to HOME position
Device with batching software:
On measuring devices with installed batching software (F-Chip → ä 121) and a suitably configured
display line, you can carry out filling processes directly using the local display. You will find a
detailed description on → ä 65.
62
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Operation
5.2.4
Icons
The icons which appear in the field on the left make it easier to read and recognize measured
variables, device status, and error messages.
Icon
Meaning
Icon
Meaning
S
System error
P
Process error
$
Fault message
(with effect on outputs)
!
Notice message
(without effect on outputs)
| 1 to n
Current output 1 to n
P 1 to n
Pulse output 1 to n
F 1 to n
Frequency output 1 to n
S 1 to n
Status output/relay output 1 to n
a0001181
Measuring mode:
PULSATING FLOW
a0001183
Measuring mode:
STANDARD
a0001182
Volume flow
Measuring mode:
SYMMETRY (bidirectional)
Mass flow
a0001188
a0001195
Batching quantity upwards
a0001201
Batching quantity downwards
a0001202
Batching quantity
Batch sum
a0001204
a0001203
Batch counter (x times)
a0001205
←
→
(scrolling
display)
Cyclic communication via
PROFIBUS active, for example via
PLC (Class 1 master)
Acyclic communication via
PROFIBUS active
(e.g. via FieldCare)
a0001206
Display value (DISPLAY_VALUE
module) with status GOOD = good
a0002322
Display value (DISPLAY_VALUE
module) with status UNC =
uncertain
a0002321
Display value (DISPLAY_VALUE
module) with status BAD = bad
a0002320
a0004616
Endress+Hauser
Output value OUT,
analog input 1 to 2
(AI module) with
status GOOD =
good
a0002325
Output value OUT,
totalizer 1 to 3
(TOTAL module)
with
status GOOD = good
63
Operation
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Icon
Meaning
a0004617
a0004618
64
Icon
Output value OUT,
analog input 1 to 2
(AI module) with
status
UNC = uncertain
Output value OUT,
analog input 1 to 2
(AI module) with
status
BAD = bad
Meaning
a0002327
a0002329
Output value OUT,
totalizer 1 to 3
(TOTAL module)
with status
UNC= unclear
Output value OUT,
totalizer 1 to 3
(TOTAL module)
with status
BAD= bad
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Operation
5.2.5
Controlling the batching processes using the local display
Filling processes can be carried out directly by means of the local display with the aid of the optional
"(Batching)" software package (F-CHIP, accessories → ä 123). Therefore, the device can be fully
deployed in the field as a "batch controller."
Procedure:
1.
Configure all the required batching functions and assign the lower display info line (=
BATCHING KEYS) using the "Batch" Quick Setup menu (→ ä 85) or use the function matrix
( → ä 66).
The following "softkeys" then appear on the bottom line of the local display → å 43:
– START = left display key (S)
– PRESET = middle display key (O)
– MATRIX = right display key (F)
2.
Press the "PRESET (O)" key. Various batching process functions requiring configuration will
now appear on the display:
"PRESET" → Initial settings for the batching process
No.
Function
Settings
7200
BATCH SELECTOR
OS → Selection of the batching fluid (BATCH #1 to 6)
7203
BATCHING QUANTITY
If the "ACCESS CUSTOMER" option was selected for the "PRESET
batch quantity" prompt in the "Batching" Quick Setup, the batching
quantity can be altered via the local display. If the "LOCKED" option
was selected, the batching quantity can only be read and cannot be
altered until the private code has been entered.
7265
RESET TOTAL QUANTITY/
TOTALIZER
Resets the batching quantity counter or the total batching quantity to
"0".
3.
After exiting the PRESET menu, you can now start the batching process by pressing "START
(S)". New softkeys (STOP/HOLD or GO ON) now appear on the display. You can use these
to interrupt, continue or stop the batching process at any time. → å 43
STOP (S) → Stops batching process
HOLD (O) → Interrupts batching process (softkey changes to "GO ON")
GO ON (O) → Continues batching process (softkey changes to "HOLD")
After the batch quantity is reached, the "START" or "PRESET" softkeys reappear on the display.
+2.5 l
+2.5 l
0.0 l
0.0 l
START
PRESET
MATRIX
-
+
E
STOP
STOP
HOLD
MATRIX
GO ON
MATRIX
a0004386
Fig. 43:
Endress+Hauser
Controlling batching processes using the local display (softkeys)
65
Operation
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
5.3
!
Brief Operating Manual to the function matrix
Note!
• Be certain to observe the general notes → ä 67
• Function descriptions → see the "Description of Device Functions" manual
1.
HOME position → F → Entry into the function matrix
2.
O / S → Select a block (e.g. OUTPUTS)
3.
O / S → Select a group (e.g. CURRENT OUTPUT 1)
4.
O / S → Select a function group (e.g. CONFIGURATION)
5.
Select a function (e.g. TIME CONSTANT)
Change parameter/enter numerical values:
OS → Select or enter enable code, parameters, numerical values
F → Save your entries
6.
Exit the function matrix:
– Press and hold down the Esc key (X) for longer than 3 seconds → HOME position
– Repeatedly press the Esc key (X) → Return step-by-step to HOME position
Esc
-
+
E
r
Esc
–
Esc
+
–
>3s
+
m
E
o
E
E
–
+
n
+
E
–
+
q
p
+
E
–
E
E
E
+
+
–
–
–
E
E
E
E
a0001210
Fig. 44:
66
Selecting functions and configuring parameters (function matrix)
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Operation
5.3.1
General notes
The Quick Setup menu contains the default settings that are adequate for commissioning. Complex
measuring operations on the other hand necessitate additional functions that you can configure as
necessary and customize to suit your process parameters. The function matrix, therefore, comprises
a multiplicity of additional functions which, for the sake of clarity, are arranged on a number of
menu levels (blocks, groups, and function groups).
Comply with the following instructions when configuring functions:
• You select functions as described → ä 66.
Each cell in the function matrix is identified by a numerical or letter code on the display.
• You can switch off certain functions (OFF). If you do so, related functions in other function groups
will no longer be displayed.
• Certain functions prompt you to confirm your data entries. Press OS to select "SURE [ YES ]" and
press F to confirm. This saves your setting or starts a function, as applicable.
• Return to the HOME position is automatic if no key is pressed for 5 minutes.
• Programming mode is disabled automatically if you do not press a key within 60 seconds
following automatic return to the HOME position.
"
!
Caution!
All functions are described in detail, as is the function matrix itself, in the "Description of Device
Functions" manual which is a separate part of this Operating Manual.
Note!
• The transmitter continues to measure while data entry is in progress, i.e. the current measured
values are output via the signal outputs or the fieldbus communication in the normal way.
• If the supply voltage fails, all preset and configured values remain stored safely in the EEPROM.
5.3.2
Enabling the programming mode
The function matrix can be disabled. Disabling the function matrix rules out the possibility of
inadvertent changes to device functions, numerical values or factory settings. A numerical code
(factory setting = 53) has to be entered before settings can again be changed.
If you use a code number of your choice, you exclude the possibility of unauthorized persons
accessing data ( → see the "Description of Device Functions" manual).
Comply with the following instructions when entering codes:
• If programming is disabled and the OS operating elements are pressed in any function, a prompt
for the code automatically appears on the display.
• If "0" is entered as the customer's code, programming is always enabled.
• The Endress+Hauser service organization can be of assistance if you mislay your personal code.
"
Caution!
Changing certain parameters such as all sensor characteristics, for example, influences numerous
functions of the entire measuring system, particularly measuring accuracy.
There is no need to change these parameters under normal circumstances and consequently, they
are protected by a special code known only to Endress+Hauser. Please contact your
Endress+Hauser service organization if you have any questions.
5.3.3
Disabling the programming mode
Programming mode is again disabled if you do not press an operating element within 60 seconds
following automatic return to the HOME position.
You can also disable programming in the "ACCESS CODE" function by entering any number (other
than the customer's code).
Endress+Hauser
67
Operation
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
5.4
Error messages
5.4.1
Type of error
Errors which occur during commissioning or measuring operation are displayed immediately. If two
or more system or process errors occur, the error with the highest priority is the one shown on the
display.
The measuring system distinguishes between two types of error:
• System error:
Includes all device errors, e.g. communication errors, hardware errors, etc. → ä 127.
• Process error:
Includes all application errors, e.g. empty pipe etc. → ä 136.
+24.502
P
1
XXXXXXXXXX
#000 00:00:05
2
4
5
3
a0001211
Fig. 45:
1
2
3
4
5
Error messages on the display (example)
Error type: P = process error, S = system error
Error message type: $ = fault message, ! = notice message
Error designation
Error number
Duration of most recent error occurrence (hours:minutes:seconds)
5.4.2
Error message type
The measuring device always assigns system and process errors which occur to two types of error
messages (fault or notice messages) resulting in different weightings. → ä 127
Serious system errors, e.g. module defects, are always identified and classed as "fault messages" by
the measuring device.
Notice message (!)
• The error in question has no effect on the current operation and the outputs of the measuring
device.
• Displayed as → Exclamation mark (!), error type (S: system error, P: process error).
• Displaying the device status on PROFIBUS DP/PA→ ä 127
!
68
Fault message ( $)
• The error in question interrupts or stops the current operation and has an immediate effect on the
outputs.
• Displayed as → Lightening flash ( $ ), error type (S: system error, P: process error)
• Displaying the device status on PROFIBUS DP/PA → ä 127
Note!
• Error conditions can be output via the relay outputs or the fieldbus communication.
• If an error message occurs, an upper or lower signal level for the breakdown information
according to NAMUR NE 43 can be output via the current output.
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Operation
5.5
Operating options
For the complete operation of the measuring device, including device-specific commands, DD
(device driver) files are available to the user for the following operating aids and programs:
5.5.1
Operating program "FieldCare"
Fieldcare is Endress+Hauser’s FDT-based plant Asset Management Tool and allows the
configuration and diagnosis of intelligent field devices. By using status information, you also have a
simple but effective tool for monitoring devices. The Proline flow measuring devices are accessed
via a service interface or via the service interface FXA193.
5.5.2
Operating program "SIMATIC PDM" (Siemens)
SIMATIC PDM is a standardized, manufacturer-independent tool for the operation, configuration,
maintenance and diagnosis of intelligent field devices.
Endress+Hauser
69
Operation
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
5.5.3
Device drivers for operating programs
The following table illustrates the suitable device drivers for the operating tool in question and then
indicates where these can be obtained.
PROFIBUS DP
Valid for device software:
3.06.XX
→ DEVICE SOFTWARE function (8100)
PROFIBUS DP device data:
Profile Version:
Promag 53 ID No.:
Profile ID No.:
3.0
1526hex
9741hex
→ PROFILE VERSION function (6160)
→ DEVICE ID function (6162)
GSD file information:
Promag 53 GSD file:
Extended Format (recommended): eh3x1526.gsd
Standard Format:
eh3_1526.gsd
!
Note!
Before configuring the PROFIBUS network, read and follow the information for
using the GSD file → ä 96
Bitmaps:
EH_1526_d.bmp/.dib
EH_1526_n.bmp/.dib
EH_1526_s.bmp/.dib
Profile GSD file:
PA039741.gsd
Software release:
06.2010
Operating program/Device driver:
Sources for obtaining device drivers/program updates:
Promag 53 GSD file:
• www.endress.com → Download
• www.profibus.com
• CD-ROM (Endress+Hauser order number: 56003894)
FieldCare/DTM
• www.endress.com → Download
• CD-ROM (Endress+Hauser order number: 56004088)
• DVD (Endress+Hauser order number: 70100690)
SIMATIC PDM
• www.endress.com → Download
Tester/simulator:
!
70
Device:
How to acquire:
Fieldcheck
• Update by means of FieldCare with the Flow Device FXA193/291 DTM in
the Fieldflash module.
Note!
The Fieldcheck tester/simulator is used for testing flowmeters in the field. When used in
conjunction with the "FieldCare" software package, test results can be imported into a database,
printed and used for official certification. Contact your Endress+Hauser representative for more
information.
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Operation
PROFIBUS PA
Valid for device software:
3.06.XX
→ DEVICE SOFTWARE function (8100)
PROFIBUS PA device data:
Profile Version:
Promag 53 ID No.:
Profile ID No.:
3.0
1527hex
9741hex
→ PROFILE VERSION function (6160)
→ DEVICE ID function (6162)
Extended Format (recommended):
Standard Format:
eh3x1527.gsd
eh3_1527.gsd
GSD file information:
Promag 53 GSD file:
!
Note!
Before configuring the PROFIBUS network, read and follow the information for
using the GSD file → ä 96
Bitmaps:
EH_1527_d.bmp/.dib
EH_1527_n.bmp/.dib
EH_1527_s.bmp/.dib
Profile GSD file:
PA139741.gsd
Software release:
06.2010
Operating program/device driver:
Sources for obtaining device drivers/program updates:
Promag 53 GSD file:
• www.endress.com → Download
• www.profibus.com
• CD-ROM (Endress+Hauser order number: 56003894)
FieldCare/DTM
• www.endress.com → Download
• CD-ROM (Endress+Hauser order number: 56004088)
• DVD (Endress+Hauser order number: 70100690)
SIMATIC PDM
• www.endress.com → Download
Tester/simulator:
!
Endress+Hauser
Device:
How to acquire:
Fieldcheck
• Update by means of FieldCare with the Flow Device FXA193/291 DTM in
the Fieldflash module.
Note!
The Fieldcheck tester/simulator is used for testing flowmeters in the field. When used in
conjunction with the "FieldCare" software package, test results can be imported into a database,
printed and used for official certification. Contact your Endress+Hauser representative for more
information.
71
Operation
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
5.6
Hardware PROFIBUS DP settings
5.6.1
Configuring the write protection
A jumper on the I/O board provides the means of switching hardware write protection on or off.
When the hardware write protection is switched on, it is not possible to write to the device
parameters via PROFIBUS (cyclic data transmission, e.g. via FieldCare).
#
Warning!
Risk of electric shock. Exposed components carry dangerous voltages. Make sure that the power
supply is switched off before you remove the cover of the electronics compartment.
1.
Switch off power supply.
2.
Remove the I/O board. → ä 143
3.
Configure the hardware write protection accordingly with the aid of the jumpers (see Figure).
4.
Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure.
1.1
LED
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
1
1.2
A
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
T
PU
3
UT
O
T/
PU
IN
T
PU
4
1.1
UT
/O
IN
LED
1
2
3
4
W
E
N
O
T
PU
1
1.2
B
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
a0003326
Fig. 46:
72
Switching write protection on and off with the aid of a jumper on the I/O board
A
B
Flexible assignment board
Permanent assignment board
1
1.1
Jumper for switching write protection on and off
Write protection switched on = it is not possible to write to the device parameters via PROFIBUS (acyclic
data transmission, e.g. via FieldCare)
1.2
Write protection switched off (factory setting) = it is possible to write to the device parameters via PROFIBUS
(acyclic data transmission, e.g. via FieldCare).
LED
Overview of LED states:
– Lit continuously → Ready for operation
– Not lit → Not ready for operation
– Flashing → System or process error present → ä 125
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Operation
5.6.2
Configuring the device address
The address must always be configured for a PROFIBUS DP/PA device. The valid device addresses
are in the range from 0 to 126. In a PROFIBUS DP/PA network, each address can only be assigned
once. If an address is not configured correctly, the device is not recognized by the master. All
measuring devices are delivered from the factory with the address 126 and with software
addressing.
Addressing via local operation
Addressing takes place in the FIELDBUS ADDRESS function (6101) → see the "Description of
Device Functions" manual.
Addressing via miniature switches
#
Warning!
Risk of electric shock. Exposed components carry dangerous voltages. Make sure that the power
supply is switched off before you remove the cover of the electronics compartment.
1.
Loosen the Allen screw (3 mm) of the securing clamp.
2.
Unscrew cover of the electronics compartment from the transmitter housing.
3.
Remove the local display (if present) by loosening the set screws of the display module.
4.
Set the position of the miniature switches on the I/O board using a sharp pointed object.
5.
Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure.
OFF ON
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
1
1
2
2
3
4
4
8
1
16
2
32
3
64
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
4
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
b
1
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
a
2
c
3
4
OFF ON
a0002821
Fig. 47:
a
b
c
Endress+Hauser
Addressing with the aid of miniature switches on the I/O board
Miniature switches for setting the device address (illustrated: 1 + 16 + 32 = device address 49)
Miniature switches for the address mode (method of addressing):
OFF = software addressing via local operation (factory setting)
ON = hardware addressing via miniature switches
Miniature switches not assigned
73
Operation
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
5.6.3
!
#
Configuring the terminating resistors
Note!
It is important to terminate the RS485 line correctly at the start and end of the bus segment since
impedance mismatch results in reflections on the line which can cause faulty communication
transmission.
Warning!
Risk of electric shock. Exposed components carry dangerous voltages.
Make sure that the power supply is switched off before you remove the cover of the electronics
compartment.
• For baud rates up to 1.5 MBaud, the termination is set via the terminating switch SW 1 for the
last transmitter on the bus: ON - ON - ON - ON.
• Device is operated with a baud rate >1.5 MBaud: due to the capacitive load of the user and the
resulting line reflection, make sure that an external termination is used.
In addition, the signal lines have to be protected (= shielded and grounded) for flexible assignment
boards → ä 52.
The miniature switch for termination is located on the I/O board (see Figure):
A
SW 1
B
+5V
+5V
SW 1
390 W
1
390 W
1
2
2
220 W
3
220 W
3
4
4
390 W
390 W
OFF ON
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
W
E
N
O
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
W
E
N
O
OFF ON
UT
T
PU
3
T/O
PU
IN
UT
TP
4
U
T/O
PU
IN
a0004392
Fig. 48:
Configuring the terminating resistors (for baud rates < 1.5 MBaud)
A = Factory setting
B = Setting at the last transmitter
!
74
Note!
It is generally recommended to use external termination since if a device that is terminated
internally is defect, this can result in the failure of the entire segment.
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Operation
5.6.4
Current output configuration
The current output is configured as "active" or "passive" by means of various jumpers on the current
submodule.
#
Warning!
Risk of electric shock. Exposed components carry dangerous voltages.
Make sure that the power supply is switched off before you remove the cover of the electronics
compartment.
1.
Switch off power supply.
2.
Remove the I/O board → ä 143.
3.
Position the jumpers (see Figure).
"
Caution!
Risk of destroying the measuring device. Set the jumpers exactly as shown in the diagram.
Incorrectly set jumpers can cause overcurrents that would destroy either the measuring device
or external devices connected to it.
Installation of the I/O board is the reverse of the removal procedure.
1
2
3
4
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
W
E
N
O
4.
T
PU
1.1
+
1.2
+
3
T
OU
T/
PU
1
IN
UT
4
P
UT
O
T/
PU
IN
a0004411
Fig. 49:
1
1.1
1.2
Endress+Hauser
Configuring the current input with the aid of jumpers (I/O board)
Current output
Active current output (default)
Passive current output
75
Operation
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
5.6.5
Relay output configuration
The relay contact can be configured as normally open (NO or make) or normally closed (NC or
break) contacts by means of two jumpers on the pluggable submodule. This configuration can be
called up at any time with the ACTUAL STATUS RELAY function (4740).
#
Warning!
Risk of electric shock. Exposed components carry dangerous voltages. Make sure that the power
supply is switched off before you remove the cover of the electronics compartment.
1.
Switch off power supply.
2.
Remove the I/O board → ä 143.
3.
Position the jumpers (see Figure).
"
Caution!
If you change the setting, you must always change the positions of both jumpers!
Note precisely the specified positions of the jumpers.
Installation of the I/O board is the reverse of the removal procedure.
1
2
3
4
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
W
E
N
O
4.
UT
3
TP
OU
/
UT
P
IN
T
PU
4
UT
/O
T
PU
IN
1
+
2
+
a0004412
Fig. 50:
1
2
76
Configuring relay contacts (NC/NO) on the convertible I/O board (submodule) with the help of jumpers.
Configured as NO contact (factory setting, relay 1)
Configured as NC contact (factory setting, relay 2)
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Operation
5.7
HardwarePROFIBUS PA settings
5.7.1
Configuring the write protection
A jumper on the I/O board provides the means of switching hardware write protection on or off.
When the hardware write protection is switched on, it is not possible to write to the device
parameters via PROFIBUS (cyclic data transmission, e.g. via FieldCare).
#
Warning!
Risk of electric shock. Exposed components carry dangerous voltages. Make sure that the power
supply is switched off before you remove the cover of the electronics compartment.
1.
Switch off power supply.
2.
Remove the I/O board → ä 143.
3.
Configure the hardware write protection accordingly with the aid of the jumpers (see Figure).
4.
Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure.
LED
2
1
1.1
1.2
a0001359
Fig. 51:
1
1.1
1.2
Endress+Hauser
Switching write protection on and off with the aid of a jumper on the I/O board
Jumper for switching write protection on and off
Write protection switched on = it is not possible to write to the device parameters via PROFIBUS
(acyclic data transmission, e.g. via FieldCare)
Write protection switched off (factory setting) = it is possible to write to the device parameters via PROFIBUS
(acyclic data transmission, e.g. via FieldCare).
2
Jumper without function
LED
Overview of LED states:
– Lit continuously → Ready for operation
– Not lit → Not ready for operation
– Flashing → System or process error present → ä 125
77
Operation
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
5.7.2
Configuring the device address
The address must always be configured for a PROFIBUS DP/PA device. The valid device addresses
are in the range from 1 to 126. In a PROFIBUS DP/PA network, each address can only be assigned
once. If an address is not configured correctly, the device is not recognized by the master. All
measuring devices are delivered from the factory with the address 126 and with software
addressing.
Addressing via local operation
Addressing takes place in the FIELDBUS ADDRESS function (6101) → see the "Description of
Device Functions" manual.
Addressing via miniature switches
#
Warning!
Risk of electric shock. Exposed components carry dangerous voltages. Make sure that the power
supply is switched off before you remove the cover of the electronics compartment.
1.
Loosen the Allen screw (3 mm) of the securing clamp.
2.
Unscrew cover of the electronics compartment from the transmitter housing.
3.
Remove the local display (if present) by loosening the set screws of the display module.
4.
Set the position of the miniature switches on the I/O board using a sharp pointed object.
5.
Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure.
OFF ON
1
2
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
c
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
3
4
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
3
4
4
8
1
16
2
32
3
64
a
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
1
4
b
OFF ON
a0002590
Fig. 52:
a
b
c
78
Addressing with the aid of miniature switches on the I/O board
Miniature switches for setting the device address (illustrated: 1 + 16 + 32 = device address 49)
Miniature switches for the address mode (method of addressing):
OFF = software addressing via local operation (factory setting)
ON = hardware addressing via miniature switches
Miniature switches not assigned
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
!
Commissioning
6
Commissioning
6.1
Function check
Make sure that all final checks have been completed before you start up your measuring point:
• Checklist for "Post-installation check" → ä 39
• Checklist for "Post-connection check" → ä 59
Note!
When using PROFIBUS PA, please note the following:
• The PROFIBUS interface's technical data must be maintained in accordance with IEC 61158-2
(MBP).
• A normal multimeter can be used to check the bus voltage of 9 to 32 V and the current
consumption of 11 mA at the device.
6.2
Switching on the measuring device
Once the post-connection checks have been successfully completed, it is time to switch on the
supply voltage. The device is now operational.
The measuring device performs a number of power on self-tests. As this procedure progresses the
following sequence of messages appears on the local display:
Messages: PROFIBUS DP
Messages: PROFIBUS PA
PROMAG 53
PROMAG 53
START-UP
RUNNING
Start-up message
▼
▼
PROMAG 53
DEVICE SOFTWARE
V XX.XX.XX
PROMAG 53
Display of current
software version
▼
PROFIBUS DP
RELAY OUTPUT 1
RELAY OUTPUT 2
STATUS INPUT 1
→ MEASURING OPERATION
DEVICE SOFTWARE
V XX.XX.XX
▼
PROFIBUS PA
Existing input/output modules
Input/output modules
▼
SYSTEM OK
START-UP
RUNNING
▼
Beginning of normal measuring
mode
Operation
SYSTEM OK
→ MEASURING OPERATION
Normal measuring mode commences as soon as startup completes.
Various measured-value and/or status variables (HOME position) appear on the display.
!
Endress+Hauser
Note!
If startup fails, an error message indicating the cause is displayed.
79
Commissioning
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
6.3
Quick Setup
In the case of measuring devices without a local display, the individual parameters and functions
must be configured via the configuration program, e.g. FieldCare.
If the measuring device is equipped with a local display, all the important device parameters for
standard operation, as well as additional functions, can be configured quickly and easily by means
of the following Quick Setup menus.
6.3.1
Quick Setup "Commissioning"
XXX.XXX.XX
E
++
Quick Setup
B
QS 1002
Commission
E+
Esc
-
+
E
Language
HOME-POSITION
2000
Pre-Setting
Selection
➀
System units
Volume
Mass
0402
Unit
Volume Flow
Unit
Density
Quit
0420
Value 0700
Density
0400
Unit
Mass flow
➁
Configure another unit?
YES
NO
Unit
To Bus
Selection
Output type
➂
Current Output 1
6141
Freq.-/ Pulse Output 1
Quit
Operation 4200
Mode
Frequency
Assign 4000
Pulse
Assign 4201
Current
Frequency
Assign 4221
Pulse
Current 4001
Span
End 4203
Value Freq.
Pulse 4222
Value
Value 4002
0_4 mA
Value 4204
F low
Pulse 4223
Width
Value 4003
20 mA
Value 4205
F high
Measuring 4225
Mode
Measuring 4004
Mode
Measuring 4206
Mode
Output 4226
Signal
Time 4005
Constant
Output 4207
Signal
Failsafe 4227
Mode
Failsafe 4006
Mode
Time 4208
Constant
Failsafe 4209
Mode
➃
Configure another Output?
Autom. Configuration of Display?
YES
NO
YES
NO
Automatic parameterization
of the display
Another
Quick Setup?
Batching
➅
Pulsating Flow
➆
➄
Communication
NO
Carrying out the selected Quick Setup
a0004551-en
Fig. 53:
80
Quick Setup for fast commissioning
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Commissioning
!
Note!
• The display returns to the cell SETUP COMMISSIONING (1002) if you press the ESC key combination during
parameter interrogation. The stored parameters remain valid.
• The "Commissioning" Quick Setup must be carried out before one of the other Quick Setups described in this
Operating Manual is run.
Endress+Hauser
m
Only units not yet configured in the current Setup are offered for selection in each
volume is derived from the corresponding flow unit.
n
The "YES" option remains visible until all the units have been configured.
"NO" is the only option displayed when no further units are available.
o
This prompt only appears if a current output and/or pulse/frequency output is available. Only the outputs not yet
configured in the current Setup are offered for selection in each cycle.
p
The "YES" option remains visible until all the outputs have been configured.
"NO" is the only option displayed when no further outputs are available.
q
The "automatic display configuration" option contains the following basic settings/factory settings
YES
Main line = volume flow
Additional line = totalizer 1
Information line = operating/system condition
NO
The existing (selected) settings remain.
cycle. The unit for mass and
➅
The BATCHING QUICK SETUP is only available when the optional software package BATCHING is installed.
➆
The PULSATING FLOW QUICK SETUP is only available if the device has a current output or a pulse/frequency
output.
81
Commissioning
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
6.3.2
!
Quick Setup "Pulsating Flow"
Note!
The "Pulsating flow" Quick Setup is only available if the device has a current output or a pulse/
frequency output.
Certain types of pump such as reciprocating, peristaltic and cam-type pumps, for example, create a
flow characterized by severe periodic fluctuations . Negative flows can occur with pumps of these
types on account of the closing volume of the valves or valve leaks.
!
Note!
Before carrying out the Quick Setup "Pulsating flow" the Quick Setup "Commissioning" has to be
executed → ä 80.
A
Q
Q
1
B
2
t
Q
Q
5
t
t
Q
3
4
t
t
a0001213
Fig. 54:
Flow characteristics of various types of pump
A
B
With severely pulsating flow
With low pulsating flow
1
2
3
4
5
1-cylinder cam pump
2-cylinder cam pump
Magnetic pump
Peristaltic pump, flexible connecting hose
Multi-cylinder reciprocating pump
Severely pulsating flow
Once several device functions have been configured in the "Pulsating flow" Quick Setup menu, flow
fluctuations of this nature can be compensated over the entire flow range and pulsating liquid flows
measured correctly. Below you will find detailed instructions on how to use this Quick Setup menu.
!
Note!
It is always advisable to work through the "Pulsating flow" Quick Setup menu if there is any
uncertainty about the exact flow characteristic.
Slightly pulsating flow
If flow fluctuations are no more than minor, as is the case, for example with gear-type, threecylinder or multi-cylinder pumps, it is not absolutely necessary to work through the Quick Setup
menu.
In cases of this nature, however, it is advisable to adapt the functions listed below in the function
matrix (see the "Description of Device Functions" manual) to suit local process conditions in order
to ensure a stable, unvarying output signal:
• Measuring system damping: "FLOW DAMPING" function → increase the value
• Current output damping: "TIME CONSTANT" function → increase the value
82
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Commissioning
Performing the "Pulsating Flow" Quick Setup
This Quick Setup menu guides you systematically through the setup procedure for all the device
functions that have to be modified and configured for measuring pulsating flows. Note that this has
no effect on values configured beforehand, such as measuring range, current range or full scale
value.
XXX.XXX.XX
+
B
++
E
Esc
-
Quick Setup
E
E+
HOME-POSITION
1003
Pulsating flow
Display 2002
damping
➀
Current output 1
Selection of output type
Freq.-/Pulse output 1
Quit
4200
Operation mode
Frequency
4004
4206
Measuring mode
Measuring mode
4005
4225
Measuring mode
4208
Time constant
Yes
Pulse
Time constant
➁
Configure another output ?
No
8005
Alarm delay
6400
Assign
LF-Cut off
On-value 6402
LF-Cut off
Off-value 6403
LF-Cut off
Pressure 6404
shock suppression
Quit
Quick Setup
a0004615-en
Fig. 55:
!
Endress+Hauser
Quick Setup for measuring severely pulsating flows. Recommended settings see next page
m
Only the output not yet configured in the current Setup is offered for selection in the second cycle.
n
The "YES" option remains visible until both outputs have been configured. "NO" is the only option displayed when
no further outputs are available.
Note!
• The display returns to the cell QUICK SETUP PULSATING FLOW (1003) if you press the Q key
combination during parameter interrogation.
• You can call up the Setup menu either directly from the "COMMISSIONING" Quick Setup menu
or manually by means of the function QUICK SETUP PULSATING FLOW (1003).
83
Commissioning
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Quick Setup "Pulsating Flow"
HOME position → F → MEASURAND → O → QUICK SETUP → N→ QS PULSATING FLOW (1003)
Function No.
Function name
Selection with OS
To the next function with F
1003
QS PULSATING FLOW
YES
After F is pressed by way of confirmation, the
Quick Setup menu calls up all the subsequent
functions in succession.
▼
Basic configuration
2002
DISPLAY DAMPING
3s
Signal type for "CURRENT OUTPUT 1"
4004
MEASURING MODE
PULS. FLOW
4005
TIME CONSTANT
3s
Signal type for "FREQ./PULSE OUTPUT 1" (for FREQUENCY operating mode)
4206
MEASURING MODE
PULS. FLOW
4208
TIME CONSTANT
0s
Signal type for "FREQ./PULSE OUTPUT 1" (for PULSE operating mode)
4225
MEASURING MODE
PULS. FLOW
8005
ALARM DELAY
0s
6400
ASSIGN LOW FLOW CUTOFF
VOLUME FLOW
6402
ON-VALUE LOW FLOW CUTOFF
Recommended setting:
Other settings
On-value
max. full scale (per DN)*
1000
a0004432-en
*Full scale values → ä 18
6403
OFF-VALUE LOW FLOW CUTOFF
50%
6404
PRESSURE SHOCK SUPPRESSION
0s
▼
Back to the HOME position:
→ Press and hold down the X key for longer than three seconds or
→ Repeatedly press and release the X key → Exit the function matrix step by step
84
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Commissioning
6.3.3
!
Quick Setup "Batching"
Note!
This function is only available when the additional "batching" software is installed in the measuring
device (order option). You can order this software from Endress+Hauser as an accessory at a later
date → ä 123.
This Quick Setup menu guides you systematically through the setup procedure for all the device
functions that have to be modified and configured for batching operation. These basic settings allow
simple (one-step) batching processes.
Additional settings, e.g. for multistage batching procedures, must be made via the function matrix
itself (see the "Description of Device Functions" manual).
"
!
Endress+Hauser
Caution!
The "Batching" Quick Setup sets certain device parameters for discontinuous measurement
operation.
If the measuring device is used for continuous flow measurement at a later time, we recommend at
you rerun the "Commissioning" and/or "Pulsating flow" Quick Setup.
Note!
• Before carrying out the Quick Setup "Batching" the Quick Setup "Commissioning" has to be
executed → ä 80.
• You can find detailed information on the batching functions in the separate "Description of Device
Functions" manual.
• You can also directly control filling process using the local display. During Quick Setup, an
appropriate dialog appears concerning the automatic display configuration. Acknowledge this by
clicking "YES".
This assigns special batching functions (START, PRESET, etc.) to the bottom line of the display.
These can be directly executed on site using the three operating keys ( O / S / F ). Therefore,
the measuring device can be fully deployed in the field as a "batch controller" → ä 65.
• You can also directly control the filling process using the fieldbus.
85
Commissioning
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
XXX.XXX.XX
+
+
E
Esc
-
E
B
Quick Setup
HOME-POSITION
E+
1005
QS
Batching/Dosing
6402
ON-Value
Low flow cut off
System
damping
6603
Pressure shock 6404
suppression
Batch
Selector
7200
Batch
Name
7201
Batch
Quantity
7203
7204
Fix
Compensation Quantity
Select
Output?
Relay 1
Assign
Relay
Terminal No.
YES
Locked
PRESET
Batch quantity
4700
4780
Batch
Supervision?
NO
Autom. Configuration
Display?
NO
YES
Max. Batch
Time
Relay 2
7240
Access Customer
Automatic parameterization
of the display
Quit Quick Setup
a0004433-en
Fig. 56:
86
Quick Setup "Batching". Recommended settings see next page.
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Commissioning
Recommended settings
Quick Setup "Batching"
HOME position → F → MEASURAND → O → QUICK SETUP → N → QUICK SETUP BATCHING (1005)
Function No.
Function name
Setting to be selected ( P )
(to the next function with F )
1005
QUICK SETUP BATCHING/DOSING
YES
After F is pressed by way of confirmation, the
Quick Setup menu calls up all the subsequent
functions in succession.
▼
!
Note!
Some of the functions listed below (with a gray background) are configured automatically, i.e. by the measuring system.
6400
ASSIGN LOW FLOW CUTOFF
VOLUME FLOW
6402
ON-VALUE LOW FLOW CUTOFF
The recommended setting is contained on
→ ä 84 in Function No. 6402.
6403
OFF-VALUE LOW FLOW CUTOFF
50%
6603
SYSTEM DAMPING
9
!
Note!
The parameter has to be optimized for highly
accurate and short filling processes: to do this, put
the setting to "0".
6404
PRESSURE SHOCK SUPPRESSION
0s
7200
BATCH SELECTOR
BATCH #1
7201
BATCH NAME
BATCH #1
7202
ASSIGN BATCH VARIABLE
Volume
7203
BATCH QUANTITY
0
7204
FIX COMPENSATION QUANTITY
0
7208
BATCH STAGES
1
7209
INPUT FORMAT
Value input
4700
ASSIGN RELAY
BATCHING VALVE 1
4780
TERMINAL NUMBER
Output (display only)
7220
OPEN VALVE 1
0% or 0 [unit]
7240
MAXIMUM BATCH TIME
0 s (= switched off)
7241
MINIMUM BATCH QUANTITY
0
7242
MAXIMUM BATCH QUANTITY
0
2200
ASSIGN (Main line)
BATCH NAME
2220
ASSIGN (Multiplex main line)
Off
2400
ASSIGN (Additional line)
BATCH DOWNWARDS
2420
ASSIGN (Multiplex additional line)
Off
2600
ASSIGN (Information line)
BATCHING KEYS
2620
ASSIGN (Multiplex information line)
Off
▼
Back to the HOME position:
→ Press and hold down the X key for longer than three seconds or
→ Repeatedly press and release the X key → Exit the function matrix step by step
Endress+Hauser
87
Commissioning
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
6.3.4
Quick Setup "Communication"
To establish cyclic data transfer, various arrangements between the PROFIBUS master (Class 1) and
the measuring device (slave) are required which have to be taken into consideration when
configuring various functions. These functions can be configured quickly and easily by means of the
"Communication" Quick Setup. The following table explains the parameter configuration options in
more detail.
XXX.XXX.XX
E
Esc
-
+
++
Quick Setup
B
E
HOME-POSITION
E+
Setup
1006
Communication
Fieldbus Address
Selection
GSD
Unit To Bus
6101
6140
6141
a0002600-en
Fig. 57:
Quick Setup "Communication"
Quick Setup "Communication"
HOME position → F → MEASURAND (A)→ O → QUICK SETUP (B) → N → QUICK SETUP COMMUNICATION
(1006)
Function No.
Function name
Setting to be selected ( OS )
(to the next function with F )
1006
QS-COMMUNICATION
After confirmation (YES) by pressing F the subsequent
functions are called up in succession.
6101
FIELDBUS ADDRESS
Enter the device address (permitted address range: 1 to 126)
Factory setting: 126
6140
SELECTION GSD
Select the operating mode (the GSD file) which should be used for
cyclic data transmission with the PROFIBUS master.
Options:
MANUFACT. SPEC. → The measuring device is operated with
complete device functionality.
MANUFACT V2.0 → The measuring device is used as the
replacement for the previous Promag 33 model (compatibility
mode).
PROFILE-GSD → The measuring device is operated in the
PROFIBUS Profile mode.
Factory setting:
MANUFACT. SPEC.
!
Note!
For PROFIBUS network configuration, make sure that the right
device master file (GSD file) of the measuring device is used for
the selected operating mode → ä 96.
▼
88
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Commissioning
Quick Setup "Communication"
6141
UNIT TO BUS
If this function is executed, the measured variables are transmitted
cyclically to the PROFIBUS master (Class 1) with the system units
set in the measuring device.
Options:
OFF
SET UNITS (Transmission is started by pressing
the F key)
"
Caution!
Activating this function can cause a sudden change of the
measured variables transmitted to the PROFIBUS master (Class 1);
this, in turn, can affect subsequent control routines.
▼
Back to the HOME position:
→ Press and hold down the X key for longer than three seconds or
→ Repeatedly press and release the X key = Exit the function matrix step by step
Endress+Hauser
89
Commissioning
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
6.3.5
Data backup/transmission
Using the T-DAT SAVE/LOAD function, you can transfer data (device parameters and settings)
between the T-DAT (exchangeable memory) and the EEPROM (device storage unit).
This is required in the following instances:
• Creating a backup: current data are transferred from an EEPROM to the T-DAT.
• Replacing a transmitter: current data are copied from an EEPROM to the T-DAT and then
transferred to the EEPROM of the new transmitter.
• Duplicating data: current data are copied from an EEPROM to the T-DAT and then transferred to
EEPROMs of identical measuring points.
!
Note!
For information on installing and removing the T-DAT → ä 143.
XXX.XXX.XX
Esc
-
+
E
F
O
Quick Setup
N
HOME
POSITION
T-DAT
SAVE/LOAD
P
LOAD
P
F
Restart of the
measuring device
CANCEL
F
F
YES
P
SAVE
NO
F
YES
F
P
NO
F
Input is
saved
a0001221-en
Abb. 58:
Data backup/transmission with T-DAT SAVE/LOAD function
Information on the LOAD and SAVE options available:
LOAD: Data are transferred from the T-DAT to the EEPROM.
!
Note!
• Any settings already saved on the EEPROM are deleted.
• This option is only available, if the T-DAT contains valid data.
• This option can only be executed if the software version of the T-DAT is the same or newer than
that of the EEPROM. Otherwise, the error message "TRANSM. SW-DAT" appears after restarting
and the LOAD function is then no longer available.
SAVE:
Data are transferred from the EEPROM to the T-DAT.
90
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Commissioning
6.4
!
Commissioning the PROFIBUS interface
Note!
• All functions required for commissioning are described in detail in the "Description of Device
Functions" manual which is a separate part of this Operating Manual.
• A code (factory setting: 53) must be entered to change device functions, numerical values or
factory settings → ä 67.
6.4.1
PROFIBUS DP commissioning
The following steps must be carried out in the sequence specified:
1.
Check the hardware write protection:
The WRITE PROTECT (6102) parameter indicates whether it is possible to write to the device
parameters via PROFIBUS (acyclic data transmission, e.g. via FieldCare).
!
Note!
• This check is not needed if operating via the local display.
BASIC FUNCTION (G) → PROFIBUS DP (GBA) → CONFIGURATION (610) →
WRITE PROTECT (6102) → Display of one of the following options:
– OFF (factory setting) = write access via PROFIBUS possible
– ON = write access via PROFIBUS not possible
Deactivate the write protection if necessary → ä 72.
2.
Enter the tag name (optional):
BASIC FUNCTION (G) → PROFIBUS DP (GBA) → CONFIGURATION (610) →
TAG NAME (6100)
3.
Configuring the fieldbus address:
• Software addressing using the local display:
BASIC FUNCTION (G) → PROFIBUS DP (GBA) → CONFIGURATION (610) →
FIELDBUS ADDRESS (6101)
• Hardware addressing via miniature switches → ä 73
4.
Select the system unit:
a. Determine the units by means of the system units group:
MEASURED VARIABLES (A) → SYSTEM UNITS (ACA) → CONFIGURATION (040) →
UNIT MASS FLOW (0400) / UNIT MASS (0401) / UNIT
VOLUME FLOW (0402) / …
b. In the function UNIT TO BUS (6141), select the option SET UNITS, so that the measured
variables transmitted cyclically to the PROFIBUS master (Class 1) are transmitted with the
system units set in the measuring device:
BASIC FUNCTION (G) → PROFIBUS DP (GBA) → OPERATION (614) →
UNIT TO BUS (6141)
!
Note!
– The configuration of the system units for the totalizer is described separately
→ see step 7
– If the system unit of a measured variable is changed by means of the local operation or an
operating program, this initially does not have any effect on the unit that is used to transmit
the measured variable to the PROFIBUS master (Class 1). Changed system units of the
measured variables are not transmitted to the PROFIBUS master (Class 1) until the SET
UNITS option is activated in the function BASIC FUNCTION (G) → PROFIBUS DP (GBA)
→ OPERATION (614) → UNIT TO BUS (6141).
Endress+Hauser
91
Commissioning
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
5.
Configuration of the Analog Input function blocks 1 to 2:
The measuring device has two Analog Input function blocks (AI modules), through which the
various measured variables can be cyclically transmitted to the PROFIBUS master (Class 1).
The assignment of a measured variable to the Analog Input function block is shown below
using the example of Analog Input function block 1 (AI module, slot 1).
Using the CHANNEL function (6123), you can determine the measured variable (e.g. volume
flow) to be cyclically transmitted to the PROFIBUS master (Class 1):
a. Select BASIC FUNCTION (G) → PROFIBUS DP (GBA) → FUNCTIONBLOCKS (612) →
BLOCK SELECTION (6120).
b. Select the option ANALOG INPUT 1.
c. Select the function CHANNEL (6123).
d. Select the option VOLUME FLOW.
Possible settings:
Measured variable
ID for "CHANNEL" function
VOLUME FLOW (factory setting AI function block 1)
273
MASS FLOW (factory setting AI function block 2)
277
The following measured variables are available when the additional "batching" software is installed
(order option)
BATCH UPWARDS
1346
BATCH DOWNWARDS
1347
BATCH COUNTER
1348
BATCH SUM
1349
BATCHING TIME
1354
!
Note!
If, when the PROFIBUS network configuration, the AI module was integrated in slot 1 or 5, the measured variable
selected in the CHANNEL function is transmitted cyclically to the PROFIBUS master (Class 1) for the respective
Analog Input function block 1 to 2. → ä 102
6.
Setting the measuring mode:
In the function MEASURING MODE (6601), select the flow portions to be measured by the
measuring device.
BASIC FUNCTION (G) → SYSTEM PARAMETER (GLA) → CONFIGURATION (660) →
MEASURING MODE (6601) → Selection of one of the following options:
– UNIDIRECTIONAL (factory setting) = only the positive flow portions
– BIDIRECTIONAL = the positive and negative flow components
7.
Configuration of totalizers 1 to 3:
The measuring device has three totalizers. The following example describes the configuration
of the totalizer using totalizer 1 as an example.
• Using the CHANNEL function (6133), you can determine the measured variable (e.g.
volume flow) to be cyclically transmitted to the PROFIBUS master (Class 1) as a totalizer
value:
a. Select BASIC FUNCTION (G) → PROFIBUS DP (GBA) → TOTALIZER (613) →
SELECT TOTALIZER (6130).
b. Select the option TOTALIZER 1.
c. Go to the function CHANNEL (6133).
92
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Commissioning
d. Select one of the following options:
– VOLUME FLOW (CHANNEL = 273, factory setting): the volume flow is totalized.
– MASS FLOW (CHANNEL = 277): the mass flow is totalized.
– OFF (CHANNEL = 0): no totalizing, "0" is displayed as the totalizer value.
!
Note!
If, when the PROFIBUS network configuration, the module or the function "TOTAL" was
integrated in slot 2, 3 or 4, the measured variable selected in the CHANNEL function is
transmitted cyclically to the PROFIBUS master (Class 1) for the respective totalizer 1 to 3
→ ä 102.
• Enter the desired unit for the totalizer:
BASIC FUNCTION (G) → PROFIBUS DP (GBA) → TOTALIZER (613) →
UNIT TOTALIZER (6134)
• Configure totalizer status (e.g. totalize):
BASIC FUNCTION (G) → PROFIBUS DP (GBA) → TOTALIZER (613) →
SET TOTALIZER (6135) → Select the option TOTALIZE
• Set the totalizer mode:
BASIC FUNCTION (G) → PROFIBUS DP (GBA) → TOTALIZER (613) →
TOTALIZER MODE (6137) → Selection of one of the following options:
– BALANCE (factory setting): calculates the positive and negative flow portions
– POSITIVE: calculates the positive flow portions
– NEGATIVE: calculates the negative flow portions
– HOLD VALUE: The totalizer remains at the last value
!
Note!
For the calculation of the positive and negative flow portions (BALANCE) or the negative
flow portions (NEGATIVE) to be carried out correctly, the selection BIDIRECTIONAL must
be active in the function BASIC FUNCTION (G) → SYSTEM PARAMETER (GLA) →
CONFIGURATION (660) → MEASURING MODE (6601).
8.
Select the operating mode:
Select the operating mode (GSD file) which should be used for cyclic communication with the
PROFIBUS master.
BASIC FUNCTION (G) → PROFIBUS DP (GBA) → OPERATION (614) →
SELECTION GSD (6140) → Selection of one of the following options:
– MANUFACT. SPEC. (factory setting): the complete device functionality is
available.
– MANUFACT V2.0 The device is used as the replacement for the previous Promag 33 model
(compatibility mode).
– PROFILE-GSD: The device is operated in the PROFIBUS Profile mode.
!
Note!
For PROFIBUS network configuration, make sure that the right device master file (GSD file) of
the measuring device is used for the selected operating mode → ä 96.
9.
Endress+Hauser
Configuration of cyclic data transmission in the PROFIBUS master:
A detailed description of the cyclic data transmission is contained → ä 100.
93
Commissioning
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
6.4.2
PROFIBUS PA commissioning
The following steps must be carried out in the sequence specified:
1.
Check the hardware write protection:
The WRITE PROTECT (6102) parameter indicates whether it is possible to write to the device
parameters via PROFIBUS (acyclic data transmission, e.g. via FieldCare).
!
Note!
• This check is not needed if operating via the local display.
BASIC FUNCTION (G) → PROFIBUS PA (GCA) → CONFIGURATION (610) →
WRITE PROTECT (6102) → Display of one of the following options:
– OFF (factory setting) = write access via PROFIBUS possible
– ON = write access via PROFIBUS not possible
Deactivate the write protection if necessary → ä 72.
2.
Enter the tag name (optional):
BASIC FUNCTION (G) → PROFIBUS PA (GCA) → CONFIGURATION (610) →
TAG NAME (6100)
3.
Configuring the fieldbus address:
• Software addressing using the local display:
BASIC FUNCTION (G) → PROFIBUS PA (GCA) → CONFIGURATION (610) →
FIELDBUS ADDRESS (6101)
• Hardware addressing via miniature switches → ä 73
4.
Select the system unit:
a. Determine the units by means of the system units group:
MEASURED VARIABLES (A) → SYSTEM UNITS (ACA) → CONFIGURATION (040) →
UNIT MASS FLOW (0400) / UNIT MASS (0401) / UNIT
VOLUME FLOW (0402) / …
b. In the function UNIT TO BUS (6141), select the option SET UNITS, so that the measured
variables transmitted cyclically to the PROFIBUS master (Class 1) are transmitted with the
system units set in the measuring device:
BASIC FUNCTION (G) → PROFIBUS PA (GCA) → OPERATION (614) →
UNIT TO BUS (6141)
!
Note!
– The configuration of the system units for the totalizer is described separately
→ see step 6
– If the system unit of a measured variable is changed by means of the local operation or an
operating program, this initially does not have any effect on the unit that is used to transmit
the measured variable to the PROFIBUS master (Class 1). Changed system units of the
measured variables are not transmitted to the PROFIBUS master (Class 1) until the SET
UNITS option is activated in the function BASIC FUNCTION (G) → PROFIBUS PA (GCA)
→ OPERATION (614) → UNIT TO BUS (6141).
5.
Setting the measuring mode:
In the function MEASURING MODE (6601), select the flow portions to be measured by the
measuring device.
BASIC FUNCTION (G) → SYSTEM PARAMETER (GLA) → CONFIGURATION (660) →
MEASURING MODE (6601) → Selection of one of the following options:
– UNIDIRECTIONAL (factory setting) = only the positive flow portions
– BIDIRECTIONAL = the positive and negative flow components
94
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Commissioning
6.
Configuration of totalizers 1 to 3:
The measuring device has three totalizers. The following example describes the configuration
of the totalizer using totalizer 1 as an example.
• Using the CHANNEL function (6133), you can determine the measured variable
(e.g. volume flow) to be cyclically transmitted to the PROFIBUS master (Class 1) as a
totalizer value:
a. Select BASIC FUNCTION (G) → PROFIBUS PA (GCA) → TOTALIZER (613) →
SELECT TOTALIZER (6130).
b. Select the option TOTALIZER 1.
c. Go to the function CHANNEL (6133).
d. Select one of the following options:
– VOLUME FLOW (CHANNEL = 273, factory setting): the volume flow is totalized.
– MASS FLOW (CHANNEL = 277): the mass flow is totalized.
– OFF (CHANNEL = 0): no totalizing, "0"
is displayed as the totalizer value.
!
Note!
If, when the PROFIBUS network configuration, the module or the function TOTAL was
integrated in slot 2, 3 or 4, the measured variable selected in the CHANNEL function is
transmitted cyclically to the PROFIBUS master (Class 1) for the respective totalizer 1 to 3
→ ä 102.
• Enter the desired unit for the totalizer:
BASIC FUNCTION (G) → PROFIBUS PA (GCA) → TOTALIZER (613) →
UNIT TOTALIZER (6134)
• Configure totalizer status (e.g. totalize):
BASIC FUNCTION (G) → PROFIBUS PA (GCA) → TOTALIZER (613) →
SET TOTALIZER (6135) → Select the option TOTALIZE
• Set the totalizer mode:
BASIC FUNCTION (G) → PROFIBUS PA (GCA) → TOTALIZER (613) →
TOTALIZER MODE (6137) → Selection of one of the following options:
– BALANCE (factory setting): calculates the positive and negative flow portions
– POSITIVE: calculates the positive flow portions
– NEGATIVE: calculates the negative flow portions
– HOLD VALUE: The totalizer remains at the last value
!
Note!
For the calculation of the positive and negative flow portions (BALANCE) or the negative
flow portions (NEGATIVE) to be carried out correctly, the selection BIDIRECTIONAL must
be active in the function BASIC FUNCTION (G) → SYSTEM PARAMETER (GLA) →
SETTINGS (660) → MEASURING MODE (6601).
7.
Select the operating mode:
Select the operating mode (GSD file) which should be used for cyclic communication with the
PROFIBUS master.
BASIC FUNCTION (G) → PROFIBUS PA (GCA) → OPERATION (614) →
SELECTION GSD (6140) → Selection of one of the following options:
– MANUFACT. SPEC. (factory setting): the complete device functionality is
available.
– MANUFACT V2.0 The device is used as the replacement for the previous Promag 33 model
(compatibility mode).
– PROFILE-GSD: The device is operated in the PROFIBUS Profile mode.
!
Note!
For PROFIBUS network configuration, make sure that the right device master file (GSD file) of
the measuring device is used for the selected operating mode → ä 96.
8.
Endress+Hauser
Configuration of cyclic data transmission in the PROFIBUS master:
A detailed description of the cyclic data transmission is contained → ä 100.
95
Commissioning
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
6.5
PROFIBUS DP/PA system integration
6.5.1
Device master file (GSD file)
For PROFIBUS network configuration, the device master file (GSD file) is needed for every bus user
(PROFIBUS slave). The GSD file contains a description of the properties of a PROFIBUS device, such
as supported data transmission rate and number of input and output data.
Before configuration takes place, a decision should be made as to which GSD file should be used to
operate the measuring device in the PROFIBUS DP master system.
The measuring device supports the following GSD files:
• Promag 53 GSD file (manufacturer-specific GSD file, complete device functionality)
• PROFIBUS Profile GSD file:
• Promag 33 GSD file (compatibility to previous model Promag 33)
Below you will find a detailed description of the GSD files supported.
Promag 53 GSD file (manufacturer-specific GSD file, complete device functionality)
Use this GSD file to access the complete functionality of the measuring device. In this way, devicespecific measured variables and functions are thus completely available in the PROFIBUS master
system. An overview of the modules available (input and output data):
PROFIBUS DP → ä 100
PROFIBUS PA → ä 110
GSD file with standard or extended format:
The GSD file with either the standard or the extended format must be used depending on the
configuration software used. When installing the GSD file, the GSD file with the extended format
(EH3x15xx.gsd) should always be used first.
However, if the installation or the configuration of the measuring device fails with this format, then
use the standard GSD (EH3_15xx.gsd). This differentiation is the result of different implementation
of the GSD formats in the master systems. Note the specifications of the configuration software.
Name of the Promag 53 GSD file
ID No.
GSD file
Type file
Bitmaps
PROFIBUS DP 1526 (Hex) Extended Format
(recommended):
Standard Format:
EH3x1526.gsd
EH3_1526.gsd
EH_1526.200 EH_1526_d.bmp/.dib
EH_1526_n.bmp/.dib
EH_1526_s.bmp/.dib
PROFIBUS PA 1527 (Hex) Extended Format
(recommended):
Standard Format:
EH3x1527.gsd
EH3_1527.gsd
EH_1527.200 EH_1527_d.bmp/.dib
EH_1527_n.bmp/.dib
EH_1527_s.bmp/.dib
How to acquire:
• Internet (Endress+Hauser) → www.endress.com (→ Download)
• CD-ROM with all GSD files for Endress+Hauser devices → Order No.: 56003894
96
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Commissioning
Contents of the downloadfile from the Internet and the CD-ROM:
• All Endress+Hauser GSD files (standard and extended format)
• Endress+Hauser type files
• Endress+Hauser bitmap files
• Useful information relating to the devices
PROFIBUS Profile GSD file:
The function scope of the profile GSD file is defined by the PROFIBUS Profile Specification 3.0.
The function scope is restricted compared to the manufacturer-specific GSD file (complete device
functionality). However, similar devices from different manufacturers can be interchanged with the
profile GSD file without the need to reconfigure (interchangeability).
The following modules are supported with the Profile GSD file:
→
"AI Flow" module
"AI Density" module →
"Totalizer" module
→
Analog Input function block 1 / output variable: volume flow
Analog Input function block 2 / output variable: mass flow
Totalizer function block 1 / output variable: totalized volume flow
Name of the PROFIBUS Profile GSD file
ID No.
Profile GSD file
PROFIBUS DP 9741 (Hex)
PA039741.gsd
PROFIBUS PA 9741 (Hex)
PA139741.gsd
Source
Internet (GSD library of the PROFIBUS User Organization) → www.PROFIBUS.com
Promag 33 GSD file:
Promag 33 with Profile Version 2.0 is the precursor to the Promag 53.
If Promag 33 is already being operated in the system and the measuring device has to be replaced,
Promag 53 can be used as a replacement device without having to reconfigure the
PROFIBUS DP network.
Further information → ä 99.
Endress+Hauser
97
Commissioning
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
6.5.2
Selection of the GSD file in the measuring device
Depending on which GSD file is used in the PROFIBUS master system, the corresponding GSD file
has to be configured in the device by means of the SELECTION GSD function.
BASIC FUNCTION (G) → PROFIBUS DP/PA (GBA/GCA) → OPERATION (614) → SELECTION
GSD (6140)
Promag 53 GSD file:
→
Select: MANUFACT. SPEC. (factory setting)
Profile GSD file
→
Select: PROFILE-GSD
Promag 33 GSD file:
→
Select: MANUFACT V2.0
Example
Before configuration takes place, a decision should be made as to which GSD file should be used to
configure the measuring device in the PROFIBUS master system. Below, the use of the
manufacturer-specific GSD file (complete device functionality) is shown using PROFIBUS PA as an
example:
Select the manufacturer-specific GSD file in the measuring device by means of the SELECTION
GSD function.
BASIC FUNCTION (G)→ PROFIBUS PA (GCA) → OPERATION (614) → SELECTION GSD
(6140)→ Selection: MANUFACT. SPEC. (factory setting)
1.
Before configuring the network, load the corresponding GSD file into the configuration
system/master system.
!
Note!
When installing the GSD file, always first use the GSD file with the extended format
(EH3x1527.gsd). However, if the installation or the configuration of the device fails with this
format, then use the standard GSD (EH3_1527.gsd).
Example for the configuration software Siemens STEP 7 of the Siemens PLC family S7-300/
400:
Use the GSD file with the extended format (EH3x1527.gsd). Copy the file to the subdirectory
"…siemensstep7s7datagsd". The GSD files also include bitmap files. These bitmap files are
used to display the measuring points in image form. The bitmap files must be saved to the
directory "…siemensstep7s7datansbmp".
If you are using configuration software other than that referred to above, ask your PROFIBUS
master system manufacturer which directory you should use.
2.
98
The measuring device is a modular PROFIBUS slave, i.e. the desired module configuration
(input and output data) must be performed in the next step. This can be done directly by means
of the configuration software. A detailed description of the modules supported by the
measuring device as follows:
PROFIBUS DP → ä 100
PROFIBUS PA → ä 110
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Commissioning
6.5.3
Compatibility to the previous model Promag 33
(Profile Version 2.0)
Promag 33 with Profile Version 2.0 is the precursor to Promag 53. If Promag 33 is already being
operated in the system and if the measuring device has to be replaced, Promag 53 can be used as a
replacement device without having to reconfigure the PROFIBUS network.
In the event of a device being replaced, Promag 53 completely supports the compatibility of the
cyclic data with the previous Promag 33 model.
The measuring devices can be exchanged as follows:
Existing device:
GSD file used:
Promag 33 PROFIBUS DP
(ID No. 0x1511)
Extended Format:
or
Standard Format:
EH3x1511.gsd
Extended Format:
or
Standard Format:
EH3x1505.gsd
Promag 33 PROFIBUS PA
(ID No. 0x1505)
→
To be replaced with:
→
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP
→
Promag 53 PROFIBUS PA
EH3_1511.gsd
EH3_1505.gsd
Promag 53 is accepted as the replacement device if the MANUFACT V2.0 option is activated in the
SELECTION GSD (6140) function.
The measuring device automatically detects that a Promag 33 device was configured in the
automation system and makes both suitable input and output data and measured value status
information available even though the devices differ in name and ID number. You do not have to
adjust the configuration of the PROFIBUS network in the automation system.
Procedure after replacing the measuring devices:
!
1.
Set the same (old) device address → FIELDBUS ADDRESS (6101) function
2.
In the SELECTION GSD (6140) function → Select MANUFACT V2.0
3.
Restart the measuring device → SYSTEM RESET (8046) function
Note!
If necessary, the following settings have to be configured via an operating program:
• Configuration of the application-specific parameters
• Configuration of the system units for the measured values and totalizers.
6.5.4
Maximum number of writes
If a nonvolatile device parameter is modified via the cyclic or acyclic data transmission, this change
is saved in the EEPROM of the measuring device.
The number of writes to the EEPROM is technically restricted to a maximum of 1 million.
Attention must be paid to this limit since, if exceeded, it results in data loss and measuring device
failure. For this reason, avoid constantly writing nonvolatile device parameters via the PROFIBUS!
Endress+Hauser
99
Commissioning
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
6.6
PROFIBUS DP cyclic data transmission
Below is a description of the cyclic data transmission when using the Promag 53 GSD file (complete
device functionality).
6.6.1
Block model
The block model illustrated shows which input and output data the measuring device provides for
cyclic data transmission via PROFIBUS DP.
Signal
processing
XXX.XXX.XX
Esc
-
+
E
Local
Display
Transducer
block
Measured variable 1
Measured variable 2
Measured variable 3
Measured variable …
Output value AI
Analog Input 1
Output value AI
Analog Input 2
Configuration SETTOT, MODETOT
-
Esc
+
E
PROFIBUS
PROFILE
Parameter
Out value TOTAL
Totalizer 1
Configuration SETTOT, MODETOT
Totalizer 2
Manufacturer
specific
Parameter
Out value TOTAL
Configuration SETTOT, MODETOT
Totalizer 3
Measured variable 1
Out value TOTAL
PROFIBUS DP
Physical
Block
Measured variable 2
Display value (DISPLAY_VALUE)
Control (CONTROL_BLOCK)
Batching quantity (BATCHING_QUANTITY)
Compensation quantity (BATCHING_FIX_COMP_QUANTITY)
a0004625-en
Fig. 59:
6.6.2
Block model for Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP Profile 3.0
Modules for cyclic data transmission
The measuring device is a so-called modular PROFIBUS slave. In contrast to a compact slave, the
structure of a modular slave is variable - it consists of several individual modules. In the GSD file,
the individual modules (input and output data) are described with their individual properties. The
modules are permanently assigned to the slots, i.e. the sequence or arrangement of the modules
must be observed when configuring the modules (see following table). Gaps between configured
modules have to be assigned the EMPTY_MODULE module.
To optimize the data throughput rate of the PROFIBUS network, it is recommended to only
configure modules that are processed in the PROFIBUS master system.
100
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Commissioning
It is essential to adhere to the following sequence/assignment when configuring the modules in the
PROFIBUS master system:
!
Slot
sequence
Module
1
AI
2
TOTAL or
SETTOT_TOTAL or
SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL
Totalizer function block 1
TOTAL → output variable = volume flow (factory setting)
SETTOT → totalizer control
MODETOT → totalizer configuration
3
TOTAL or
SETTOT_TOTAL or
SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL
Totalizer function block 2
TOTAL → output variable = volume flow (factory setting)
SETTOT → totalizer control
MODETOT → totalizer configuration
4
TOTAL or
SETTOT_TOTAL or
SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL
Totalizer function block 3
TOTAL → output variable = volume flow (factory setting)
SETTOT → totalizer control
MODETOT → totalizer configuration
5
AI
6
DISPLAY_VALUE
7
CONTROL_BLOCK
8
BATCHING_QUANTITY
9
BATCHING_FIX_COMP_QUANTITY
Description
Analog Input function block 1
Output variable → volume flow (factory setting)
Analog Input function block 2
Output variable → mass flow (factory setting)
Value for local display
Control of device functions
Batching quantity
Fixed correction quantity
Note!
• The assignment of the measured variables for the Analog Input function blocks (1 to 2) and the
totalizer function blocks (1 to 3) can be changed by means of the CHANNEL function. A detailed
description of the individual modules is contained in the following section.
• The device has to be reset once a new configuration has been loaded to the automation system.
This can be effected as follows:
– By means of the local display
– By means of an operating program (e.g. FieldCare)
– By switching the supply voltage off and on again.
6.6.3
Description of the modules
AI (Analog Input) module
The AI module (slots 1, 5) cyclically transmits the corresponding measured variable, including the
status, to the PROFIBUS master (Class 1). The measured variable is represented in the first
four bytes in the form of floating point numbers in accordance with the IEEE 754 standard. The fifth
byte contains standardized status information corresponding to the measured variable.
Further information on the device status → ä 127
Input data
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
measured variable (IEEE 754 floating point number)
Endress+Hauser
Byte 5
Status
101
Commissioning
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Assignment of the measured variables to the AI module
The AI module can transmit different measured variables to the PROFIBUS master (Class 1).
The measured variables are assigned to the Analog Input function blocks 1 to 2 by means of the local
display or with the aid of an operating program (e.g. FieldCare) in the CHANNEL function:
BASIC FUNCTION (G) → PROFIBUS DP (GBA) → FUNCTION BLOCKS (612) →
BLOCK SELECTION (6120): Selection of an Analog Input function block →
CHANNEL (6123): Selection of a measured variable
Possible settings
Measured variable
ID for CHANNEL function
VOLUME FLOW
273
MASS FLOW
277
The following measured variables are available when the additional "batching" software is installed (order
option)
!
BATCH UPWARDS
1346
BATCH DOWNWARDS
1347
BATCH COUNTER
1348
BATCH SUM
1349
BATCHING TIME
1354
Note!
The measured variables for the additional "batching" software are available only when they are
installed in the measuring device. If the measured variable is selected even if the additional software
is not installed, the value "0" is transmitted to the PROFIBUS master (Class 1) for the measured
variable.
Factory setting
Module
Analog Input
function block
Measured variable
ID for CHANNEL function
AI (slot 1)
1
VOLUME FLOW
273
AI (slot 5)
2
MASS FLOW
277
TOTAL module
The measuring device has three totalizer function blocks. The totalizer values can be cyclically
transmitted to the PROFIBUS (Class 1) via the TOTAL module (slots 2 to 4). The totalizer value is
represented in the first four bytes in the form of a floating point number in accordance with the IEEE
754 standard. The fifth byte contains standardized status information corresponding to the totalizer
value.
Further information on the device status → ä 127
Input data
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Totalizer value (IEEE 754 floating point number)
102
Byte 5
Status
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Commissioning
Assignment of the measured variables to the TOTAL module
The TOTAL module can transmit different totalizer variables to the PROFIBUS master (Class 1).
The measured variables are assigned to the totalizer function blocks 1 to 3 by means of the local
display or with the aid of an operating program (e.g. FieldCare) in the CHANNEL function:
BASIC FUNCTION (G) → PROFIBUS DP (GBA) → TOTALIZER (613) →
SELECT TOTALIZER (6130): Selection of a totalizer →
CHANNEL (6133): Selection of measured variable
Possible settings
Totalizer value/measured variable
ID for CHANNEL function
VOLUME FLOW
273
MASS FLOW
277
OFF
0
Factory setting
Module
Totalizer
function block
Totalizer value/
Measured variable
Unit
ID for CHANNEL
function
TOTAL (slot 2)
1
VOLUME FLOW
m3
273
TOTAL (slot 3)
2
VOLUME FLOW
m3
273
TOTAL (slot 4)
3
VOLUME FLOW
m3
273
SETTOT_TOTAL module
The module combination SETTOT_TOTAL (slots 2 to 4) consists of the functions SETTOT and
TOTAL.
With this module combination:
• The totalizer can be controlled via the automation system (SETTOT).
• The totalizer value, is transmitted, including the status (TOTAL)
SETTOT function
In the SETTOT function, the totalizer can be controlled via control variables.
The following control variables are supported:
• 0 = Totalize (factory setting)
• 1 = Reset totalizer (the totalizer value is reset to 0)
• 2 = Accept totalizer preset
!
Note!
After the totalizer value has been reset to 0 or set to the preset value, the totalizing continues
automatically. The control variable does not have to be changed to 0 again to restart totalizing.
Stopping totalizing is controlled in the SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL module via the MODETOT
function. → ä 104
TOTAL function
For a description of the TOTAL function, refer to TOTAL module → ä 102
Endress+Hauser
103
Commissioning
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Data structure of the SETTOT_TOTAL module combination
Output data
Input data
SETTOT
TOTAL
Byte 1
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Control
Totalizer value (IEEE 754 floating point number)
Status
SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL module
The module combination SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL (slots 2 to 4) consists of the functions
SETTOT, MODETOT and TOTAL.
With this module combination:
• The totalizer can be controlled via the automation system (SETTOT).
• The totalizer can be configured via the automation system (MODETOT).
• The totalizer value, is transmitted, including the status (TOTAL)
SETTOT function
For a description of the SETTOT function, refer to SETOT_TOTAL module → ä 103
MODETOT function
In the MODETOT function, the totalizer can be configured via control variables.
The following settings are possible:
• 0 = Balance (factory setting), calculates the positive and negative flow portions
• 1 = calculates the positive flow portions
• 2 = calculates the negative flow portions
• 3 = Totalizing is stopped
!
Note!
For the calculation of the positive and negative flow portions (control variable 0) or the negative
flow portions only (control variable 2) to be carried out correctly, the option BIDIRECTIONAL must
be active in the MEASURING MODE (6601) function.
TOTAL function
For a description of the TOTAL function, refer to TOTAL module → ä 102
Data structure of the SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL module combination
Output data
SETTOT
MODETOT
Byte 1
Byte 2
Control
Configuration
Input data
TOTAL
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Totalizer value (IEEE 754 floating point number)
Status
Example of using the SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL module
If the SETTOT function is set to 1 (= reset the totalizer), the value for the aggregated total is reset
to 0.
If the aggregated total of the totalizer should constantly retain the value 0, the MODETOT function
must first be set to 3 (= totalizing is stopped) and then the SETTOT function must be set to 1 (=
reset the totalizer).
104
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Commissioning
DISPLAY_VALUE module
Any value (IEEE 754 floating point number), including status, can be cyclically transmitted via the
PROFIBUS master (Class 1) directly to the local display using the DISPLAY_VALUE module (slot 6).
Display value assignment to the main line, additional line or information line can be configured via
the local display itself or an operating program (e.g. FieldCare).
Output data
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Display value (IEEE 754 floating point
number)
Byte 5
Status
Status
The measuring device interprets the status in accordance with PROFIBUS Profile Specification
Version 3.0. The statuses OK, BAD and UNCERTAIN are indicated on the local display by a
corresponding symbol. → ä 63
CONTROL_BLOCK module
By means of the CONTROL_BLOCK module (slot 7), the measuring device is able to process devicespecific control variables from the PROFIBUS master (Class 1) in cyclic data transmission
(e.g. switching on positive zero return).
Supported control variables of the CONTROL_BLOCK module
The following device-specific control variables can be activated by changing the output byte from
0 → x:
Module
Control variables
0 → 2: Positive zero return ON
0 → 3: Positive zero return OFF
0 → 8: UNIDIRECTIONAL measuring mode
0 → 9: BIDIRECTIONAL measuring mode
0 → 24: Run UNIT TO BUS function
Control variables that are executed only if the measuring device is equipped
with the optional Electrode Cleaning Circuit (ECC)
0 → 5: ECC OFF
0 → 6: ECC ON
The following control variables are only executed if the measuring device has a
relay output.
CONTROL_BLOCK
0 → 50: Relay output 1 OFF
0 → 51: Relay output 1 ON
0 → 55: Relay output 2 OFF
0 → 56: Relay output 2 ON
Control variables that are executed only if the "Batching" software plug-in is
installed in the measuring device
0 → 30: Select batching specification 1
0 → 31: Select batching specification 2
0 → 32: Select batching specification 3
0 → 33: Select batching specification 4
0 → 34: Select batching specification 5
0 → 35: Select batching specification 6
0 → 40: Stop batching
0 → 41: Start batching
0 → 42: Interrupt (pause) batching
0 → 43: Continue batching
0 → 44: Reset the fault message (affects the batching fault messages: # 471…474)
0 → 46: Reset batching counter and total batching quantity to 0
Endress+Hauser
105
Commissioning
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
!
Note!
The control (e.g. switching on positive zero return) is executed by cyclic data transmission if the
output byte
switches from "0" to the bit pattern in question. The output byte must always switch from "0".
A switchback to "0" does not have any effect.
Example (change the output byte)
From
→
To
0
→
2
Positive zero return is switched on.
2
→
0
No effect
0
→
3
Positive zero return is switched off.
3
→
2
No effect
Result
Output data
Byte 1
Control
BATCHING_QUANTITY module
The value of the quantity to be batched (IEEE 754 floating point number), including status, can be
cyclically transmitted by the PROFIBUS master (Class 1) to the measuring device using the
BATCHING_QUANTITY module (slot 8). If the batch quantity specified here is achieved, the
closing contact for valve 1 is activated. The unit selected in the measuring device is used as the unit.
"
!
Caution!
The batching quantity is a nonvolatile device parameter. For this reason, avoid constantly writing
this device parameter via PROFIBUS → ä 99.
Note!
• This module is only evaluated by the measuring device if the additional "batching" software is
installed in the measuring device (order option).
• Further explanation of the parameter BATCH QUANTITY (7203) is contained in the "Description
of Device Functions" manual, which is a separate part of this Operating Manual.
Output data
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Batch quantity (IEEE 754 floating point
number)
!
106
Byte 5
Status
Note!
The status is not evaluated by the device.
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Commissioning
BATCHING_FIX_COMP_QUANTITY module
A positive or negative correction value (IEEE 754 floating point number), including status, can be
cyclically transmitted by the PROFIBUS master (Class 1) to the measuring device using the
BATCHING_FIX_COMP_QUANTITY module (slot 9). The correction quantity balances out a
constant, system-related incorrect quantity. This can be caused, for example, by a pump overrunning or by the closing time of a valve. The correction quantity is determined by the system
operator. A negative compensation quantity must be specified for overbatching and a positive
correction quantity for underbatching. The permitted input range is +/- 10% of the batch quantity.
The unit selected in the measuring device is used as the unit.
"
!
Caution!
The batching quantity is a nonvolatile device parameter. For this reason, avoid constantly writing
this device parameter via PROFIBUS → ä 99.
Note!
• This module is only evaluated by the measuring device if the additional "batching" software is
installed in the measuring device (order option).
• If the input range is not sufficient for the correction quantity, the batching quantity may have to
be adjusted.
• Further explanation of the parameter FIX COMPENSATION QUANTITY (7204) is contained in
the "Description of Device Functions" manual, which is a separate part of this Operating Manual.
Output data:
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Fixed correction quantity (IEEE 754 floating
point number)
!
Byte 5
Status
Note!
The status is not evaluated by the device.
EMPTY_MODULE module
The measuring device is a so-called modular PROFIBUS slave. In contrast to a compact slave, the
structure of a modular slave is variable - it consists of several individual modules. In the GSD file,
the individual modules are described with their individual properties. The modules are permanently
assigned to the slots, i.e. the sequence or arrangement of the modules must be observed when
configuring the modules. Gaps between configured modules have to be assigned the
EMPTY_MODULE module.
For a more detailed description, see → ä 101.
Endress+Hauser
107
Commissioning
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
6.6.4
Configuration examples with Simatic S7 HW-Konfig
Example 1
a0004787
Fig. 60:
Complete configuration using the Promag 53 GSD file (complete device functionality)
It is essential to adhere to the following sequence when configuring the modules in the PROFIBUS
master (Class 1):
Slot
sequence
Module
Byte length
input data
Byte length
output data
1
AI
5
-
Analog Input function block 1
Output variable → volume flow (factory setting)
108
Description
2
SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL
5
2
Totalizer function block 1
TOTAL → output variable = volume flow (factory setting)
SETTOT → totalizer control
MODETOT → totalizer configuration
3
SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL
5
2
Totalizer function block 2
TOTAL → output variable = volume flow (factory setting)
SETTOT → totalizer control
MODETOT → totalizer configuration
4
SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL
5
2
Totalizer function block 3
TOTAL → output variable = volume flow (factory setting)
SETTOT → totalizer control
MODETOT → totalizer configuration
5
AI
5
-
Analog Input function block 2
Output variable → mass flow (factory setting)
6
DISPLAY_VALUE
-
5
Value for local display
7
CONTROL_BLOCK
-
1
Control of device functions
8
BATCHING_QUANTITY
-
5
Batching quantity
9
BATCHING_FIX_COMP_QUANTITY
-
5
Fixed correction quantity
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Commissioning
Example 2
a0004788
Fig. 61:
In this example, modules that are not needed are replaced by the module EMPTY_MODULE.
The Promag 53 GSD file is used (manufacturer-specific GSD file, complete device functionality)
With this configuration, the Analog Input function block 1 (slot 1), the totalizer value TOTAL (slot
2) and the cyclic control of device functions CONTROL_BLOCK (slot 7) are activated. The volume
flow (factory setting) is read out cyclically by the measuring device by means of Analog Input
function block 1. The totalizer is configured "without configuration". In other words, in this
example it only returns the totalizer value for the volume flow by means of the TOTAL module and
cannot be controlled by the PROFIBUS master (Class 1).
Slot sequence
Module
Byte length
input data
Byte length
output data
1
AI
5
-
Analog Input function block 1
Output variable → volume flow (factory setting)
2
TOTAL
5
-
Totalizer function block 1
TOTAL → output variable = volume flow (factory setting)
3
EMPTY_MODULE
-
-
Empty
4
EMPTY_MODULE
-
-
5
EMPTY_MODULE
-
-
6
EMPTY_MODULE
-
-
Empty
7
CONTROL_BLOCK
-
1
Control of device functions
Endress+Hauser
Description
Empty
Empty
109
Commissioning
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
6.7
PROFIBUS PA cyclic data transmission
Below is a description of the cyclic data transmission when using the Promag 53 GSD file (complete
device functionality).
6.7.1
Block model
The block model illustrated shows which input and output data the measuring device provides for
cyclic data transmission via PROFIBUS PA.
Signal
processing
XXX.XXX.XX
Esc
-
+
E
Local
Display
Transducer
block
Measured variable 1
Measured variable 2
Measured variable 3
Measured variable …
Output value AI
Analog Input 1
Analog Input 2
Output value AI
Configuration SETTOT, MODETOT
-
Esc
+
E
PROFIBUS
PROFILE
Parameter
Totalizer 1
Totalizer 2
Manufacturer
specific
Parameter
Out value TOTAL
Configuration SETTOT, MODETOT
Totalizer 3
Measured variable 1
Out value TOTAL
Configuration SETTOT, MODETOT
PROFIBUS PA
Physical
Block
Out value TOTAL
Measured variable 2
Display value (DISPLAY_VALUE)
Control (CONTROL_BLOCK)
a0004625-en
Fig. 62:
6.7.2
Block model for Promag 53 PROFIBUS PA Profile 3.0
Modules for cyclic data transmission
The measuring device is a so-called modular PROFIBUS slave. In contrast to a compact slave, the
structure of a modular slave is variable - it consists of several individual modules. In the GSD file,
the individual modules (input and output data) are described with their individual properties. The
modules are permanently assigned to the slots, i.e. the sequence or arrangement of the modules
must be observed when configuring the modules (see following table). Gaps between configured
modules have to be assigned the EMPTY_MODULE module.
To optimize the data throughput rate of the PROFIBUS network, it is recommended to only
configure modules that are processed in the PROFIBUS master system.
110
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Commissioning
It is essential to adhere to the following sequence/assignment when configuring the modules in the
PROFIBUS master system:
!
Slot
sequence
Module
1
AI
2
TOTAL or
SETTOT_TOTAL or
SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL
Totalizer function block 1
TOTAL → output variable = volume flow (factory setting)
SETTOT → totalizer control
MODETOT → totalizer configuration
3
TOTAL or
SETTOT_TOTAL or
SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL
Totalizer function block 2
TOTAL → output variable = volume flow (factory setting)
SETTOT → totalizer control
MODETOT → totalizer configuration
4
TOTAL or
SETTOT_TOTAL or
SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL
Totalizer function block 3
TOTAL → output variable = volume flow (factory setting)
SETTOT → totalizer control
MODETOT → totalizer configuration
5
AI
6
DISPLAY_VALUE
7
CONTROL_BLOCK
Description
Analog Input function block 1
Output variable → volume flow (factory setting)
Analog Input function block 2
Output variable → mass flow (factory setting)
Value for local display
Control of device functions
Note!
• The assignment of the measured variables for the Analog Input function blocks (1 to 2) and the
totalizer function blocks (1 to 3) can be changed by means of the CHANNEL function. A detailed
description of the individual modules is contained in the following section.
• The device has to be reset once a new configuration has been loaded to the automation system.
This can be effected as follows:
– By means of the local display
– By means of an operating program (e.g. FieldCare)
– By switching the supply voltage off and on again.
6.7.3
Description of the modules
AI (Analog Input) module
The AI module (slots 1, 5) cyclically transmits the corresponding measured variable, including the
status, to the PROFIBUS master (Class 1). The measured variable is represented in the first
four bytes in the form of floating point numbers in accordance with the IEEE 754 standard. The fifth
byte contains standardized status information corresponding to the measured variable.
Further information on the device status → ä 127
Input data
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
measured variable (IEEE 754 floating point number)
Byte 5
Status
Assignment of the measured variables to the AI module
The AI module can transmit different measured variables to the PROFIBUS master (Class 1).
The measured variables are assigned to the Analog Input function blocks 1 to 2 by means of the local
display or with the aid of an operating program (e.g. FieldCare) in the CHANNEL function:
Endress+Hauser
111
Commissioning
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
BASIC FUNCTION (G) → PROFIBUS PA (GCA) → FUNCTION BLOCKS (612) →
BLOCK SELECTION (6120): Selection of an Analog Input function block →
CHANNEL (6123): Selection of a measured variable
Possible settings
Measured variable
!
ID for CHANNEL function
VOLUME FLOW
273
MASS FLOW
277
Note!
The measured variables for the additional "batching" software are available only when they are
installed in the measuring device. If the measured variable is selected even if the additional software
is not installed, the value "0" is transmitted to the PROFIBUS master (Class 1) for the measured
variable.
Factory setting
Module
Analog Input
function block
Measured variable
ID for CHANNEL function
AI (slot 1)
1
VOLUME FLOW
273
AI (slot 5)
2
MASS FLOW
277
TOTAL module
The measuring device has three totalizer function blocks. The totalizer values can be cyclically
transmitted to the PROFIBUS (Class 1) via the TOTAL module (slots 2 to 4). The totalizer value is
represented in the first four bytes in the form of a floating point number in accordance with the IEEE
754 standard. The fifth byte contains standardized status information corresponding to the totalizer
value.
Further information on the device status → ä 127
Input data
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Totalizer value (IEEE 754 floating point number)
Byte 5
Status
Assignment of the measured variables to the TOTAL module
The TOTAL module can transmit different totalizer variables to the PROFIBUS master (Class 1).
The measured variables are assigned to the totalizer function blocks 1 to 3 by means of the local
display or with the aid of an operating program (e.g. FieldCare) in the CHANNEL function:
BASIC FUNCTION (G) → PROFIBUS PA (GCA) → TOTALIZER (613) →
SELECT TOTALIZER (6130): Selection of a totalizer →
CHANNEL (6133): Selection of measured variable
Possible settings
Totalizer value/measured variable
VOLUME FLOW
273
MASS FLOW
277
OFF
112
ID for CHANNEL function
0
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Commissioning
Factory setting
Module
Totalizer
function block
Totalizer value/
Measured variable
Unit
ID for CHANNEL
function
TOTAL (slot 2)
1
VOLUME FLOW
m3
273
TOTAL (slot 3)
2
VOLUME FLOW
m3
273
TOTAL (slot 4)
3
VOLUME FLOW
m3
273
Example:
You want to cyclically transmit the totalized volume flow as totalizer value 1 to the PROFIBUS
master (Class 1) by means of the TOTAL module (slot 7):
BASIC FUNCTION (G) → PROFIBUS PA (GCA) → TOTALIZER (613) →
select TOTALIZER (6130): Select TOTALIZER 1, then select CHANNEL (6133) = VOLUME FLOW
SETTOT_TOTAL module
The module combination SETTOT_TOTAL (slots 2 to 4) consists of the functions SETTOT and
TOTAL.
With this module combination:
• The totalizer can be controlled via the automation system (SETTOT).
• The totalizer value, is transmitted, including the status (TOTAL)
SETTOT function
In the SETTOT function, the totalizer can be controlled via control variables.
The following control variables are supported:
• 0 = Totalize (factory setting)
• 1 = Reset totalizer (the totalizer value is reset to 0)
• 2 = Accept totalizer preset
!
Note!
After the totalizer value has been reset to 0 or set to the preset value, the totalizing continues
automatically. The control variable does not have to be changed to 0 again to restart totalizing.
Stopping totalizing is controlled in the SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL module via the MODETOT
function → ä 104.
TOTAL function
For a description of the TOTAL function, refer to TOTAL module → ä 102
Data structure of the SETTOT_TOTAL module combination
Endress+Hauser
Output data
Input data
SETTOT
TOTAL
Byte 1
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Control
Totalizer value (IEEE 754 floating point number)
Status
113
Commissioning
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL module
The module combination SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL (slots 2 to 4) consists of the functions
SETTOT, MODETOT and TOTAL.
With this module combination:
• The totalizer can be controlled via the automation system (SETTOT).
• The totalizer can be configured via the automation system (MODETOT).
• The totalizer value, is transmitted, including the status (TOTAL)
SETTOT function
For a description of the SETTOT function, refer to SETOT_TOTAL module → ä 103
MODETOT function
In the MODETOT function, the totalizer can be configured via control variables.
The following settings are possible:
• 0 = Balance (factory setting), calculates the positive and negative flow portions
• 1 = calculates the positive flow portions
• 2 = calculates the negative flow portions
• 3 = Totalizing is stopped
!
Note!
For the calculation of the positive and negative flow portions (control variable 0) or the negative
flow portions only (control variable 2) to be carried out correctly, the option BIDIRECTIONAL must
be active in the MEASURING MODE (6601) function.
TOTAL function
For a description of the TOTAL function, refer to TOTAL module → ä 102
Data structure of the SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL module combination
Output data
SETTOT
MODETOT
Byte 1
Byte 2
Control
Configuration
Input data
TOTAL
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Totalizer value (IEEE 754 floating point number)
Status
Example of using the SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL module
If the SETTOT function is set to 1 (= reset the totalizer), the value for the aggregated total is reset
to 0.
If the aggregated total of the totalizer should constantly retain the value 0, the MODETOT function
must first be set to 3 (= totalizing is stopped) and then the SETTOT function must be set to 1 (=
reset the totalizer).
114
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Commissioning
DISPLAY_VALUE module
Any value (IEEE 754 floating point number), including status, can be cyclically transmitted via the
PROFIBUS master (Class 1) directly to the local display using the DISPLAY_VALUE module (slot 6).
Display value assignment to the main line, additional line or information line can be configured via
the local display itself or an operating program (e.g. FieldCare).
Output data
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Display value (IEEE 754 floating point
number)
Byte 5
Status
Status
The measuring device interprets the status in accordance with PROFIBUS Profile Specification
Version 3.0. The statuses OK, BAD and UNCERTAIN are indicated on the local display by a
corresponding symbol. → ä 63
CONTROL_BLOCK module
By means of the CONTROL_BLOCK module (slot 7), the measuring device is able to process devicespecific control variables from the PROFIBUS master (Class 1) in cyclic data transmission
(e.g. switching on positive zero return).
Supported control variables of the CONTROL_BLOCK module
The following device-specific control variables can be activated by changing the output byte from
0 → x:
Module
CONTROL_BLOCK
Control variables
0 → 2: Positive zero return ON
0 → 3: Positive zero return OFF
0 → 8: UNIDIRECTIONAL measuring mode
0 → 9: BIDIRECTIONAL measuring mode
0 → 24: Run UNIT TO BUS function
Control variables that are executed only if the measuring device is equipped
with the optional Electrode Cleaning Circuit (ECC)
0 → 5: ECC OFF
0 → 6: ECC ON
!
Endress+Hauser
Note!
The control (e.g. switching on positive zero return) is executed by cyclic data transmission if the
output byte
switches from "0" to the bit pattern in question. The output byte must always switch from "0". A
switchback to "0" does not have any effect.
115
Commissioning
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Example (change the output byte)
From
→
To
0
→
2
Positive zero return is switched on.
2
→
0
No effect
0
→
3
Positive zero return is switched off.
3
→
2
No effect
Result
Output data
Byte 1
Control
EMPTY_MODULE module
The measuring device is a so-called modular PROFIBUS slave. In contrast to a compact slave, the
structure of a modular slave is variable - it consists of several individual modules. In the GSD file,
the individual modules are described with their individual properties. The modules are permanently
assigned to the slots, i.e. the sequence or arrangement of the modules must be observed when
configuring the modules. Gaps between configured modules have to be assigned the
EMPTY_MODULE module.
For a more detailed description, see → ä 101
116
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Commissioning
6.7.4
Configuration examples with Simatic S7 HW-Konfig
Example 1
a00047879
Fig. 63:
Complete configuration using the Promag 53 GSD file (complete device functionality)
It is essential to adhere to the following sequence when configuring the modules in the PROFIBUS
master (Class 1):
Slot
sequence
Module
Byte length
input data
Byte length
output data
1
AI
5
-
Analog Input function block 1
Output variable → volume flow (factory setting)
Description
2
SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL
5
2
Totalizer function block 1
TOTAL → output variable = volume flow (factory setting)
SETTOT → totalizer control
MODETOT → totalizer configuration
3
SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL
5
2
Totalizer function block 2
TOTAL → output variable = volume flow (factory setting)
SETTOT → totalizer control
MODETOT → totalizer configuration
Totalizer function block 3
TOTAL → output variable = volume flow (factory setting)
SETTOT → totalizer control
MODETOT → totalizer configuration
4
SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL
5
2
5
AI
5
-
Analog Input function block 2
Output variable → mass flow (factory setting)
6
DISPLAY_VALUE
-
5
Value for local display
7
CONTROL_BLOCK
-
1
Control of device functions
Endress+Hauser
117
Commissioning
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Example 2
a0004790
Fig. 64:
In this example, modules that are not needed are replaced by the module EMPTY_MODULE.
The Promag 53 GSD file is used (manufacturer-specific GSD file, complete device functionality)
With this configuration, the Analog Input function block 1 (slot 1), the totalizer value TOTAL (slot
2) and the cyclic control of device functions CONTROL_BLOCK (slot 7) are activated. The volume
flow (factory setting) is read out cyclically by the measuring device by means of Analog Input
function block 1. The totalizer is configured "without configuration". In other words, in this
example it only returns the totalizer value for the volume flow by means of the TOTAL module and
cannot be controlled by the PROFIBUS master (Class 1).
Slot sequence
Module
Byte length
input data
Byte length
output data
1
AI
5
-
Analog Input function block 1
Output variable → volume flow (factory setting)
2
TOTAL
5
-
Totalizer function block 1
TOTAL → output variable = volume flow (factory setting)
3
EMPTY_MODULE
-
-
Empty
4
EMPTY_MODULE
-
-
5
EMPTY_MODULE
-
-
6
EMPTY_MODULE
-
-
Empty
7
CONTROL_BLOCK
-
1
Control of device functions
118
Description
Empty
Empty
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Commissioning
6.8
PROFIBUS DP/PA acyclic data transmission
Acyclic data transmission is used to transmit parameters during commissioning or maintenance, or
to display additional measured variables that are not included in cyclic data traffic. Thus parameters
for identification, control or adjustment in the various blocks (physical block, transducer block,
function block) can be changed while the device is in the process of cyclic data transmission with a
PLC.
The measuring device supports the two basic types of acyclic data transmission:
• MS2AC communication with 2 available SAP´s
• MS1AC communication
6.8.1
Master class 2 acyclic (MS2AC)
MS2AC is acyclic data transmission between a field device and a Class 2 master (z.B. FieldCare,
Siemens PDM etc. → ä 69). During this process, the master opens a communication channel via
an SAP (Service Access Point) to access the device.
All parameters to be exchanged with a device via PROFIBUS must be made known to a Class 2
master. This assignment to each individual parameter takes place either in a device description
(DD), a DTM (Device Type Manager), or inside a software component in the master via slot and
index addressing.
When using MS2AC communication, note the following:
• As described above, a Class 2 master accesses a device via special SAP´s.
Therefore, the number of Class 2 masters that can communicate with a device simultaneously is
limited to the number of SAPs available for this data transmission.
• The use of a Class 2 master increases the cycle time of the bus system. This must be taken into
account when programming the control system used.
6.8.2
Master class 1 acyclic (MS1AC)
In MS1AC, a cyclic master, that is already reading the cyclic data from the device or writing to the
device opens the communication channel via the SAP 0x33 (special Service Access Point for
MS1AC) and can then read or write a parameter acyclically like a Class 2 master via the slot and
the index (if supported).
When using MS1AC communication, note the following:
• Currently, few PROFIBUS masters on the market support this data transmission.
• MS1AC is not supported by all PROFIBUS devices.
• In the user program, note that constant writing of parameters (for example, at every cycle of the
program) can drastically reduce the service life of a device. Acyclically written parameters are
written to voltage-resistant memory modules (EEPROM, Flash etc.). These memory modules are
designed for a limited number of write operations. In normal operation without MS1AC (during
parameter configuration), the number of write operations does not even come close to this
number. If programming is incorrect, this maximum number can be reached quickly, drastically
reducing a device's service life.
!
Note!
The memory module of the measuring device is designed for one million write operations.
Endress+Hauser
119
Commissioning
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
6.9
Adjustment
6.9.1
Empty-pipe/Full-pipe adjustment
Flow cannot be measured correctly unless the measuring pipe is completely full.
This status can be monitored at all times with the Empty Pipe Detection function:
• EPD = Empty Pipe Detection (with the help of an EPD electrode)
• OED = Open Electrode Detection (Empty Pipe Detection with the help of the measuring
electrodes, if the sensor is not equipped with an EPD electrode or the orientation is not suitable
for using EPD).
"
!
Caution!
A detailed description and other helpful hints for the empty-pipe/full-pipe adjustment procedure
are contained in the separate "Description of Device Functions" manual:
• EPD/OED ADJUSTMENT (6481) → Carrying out the adjustment.
• EPD (6420) → Switching on and off EPD/OED.
• EPD RESPONSE TIME (6425) → Input of the response time for EPD/OED.
Note!
• The EPD function is not available unless the sensor is fitted with an EPD electrode.
• The devices are already calibrated at the factory with water (approx. 500 μS/cm). If the liquid
conductivity differs from this reference, empty-pipe/full-pipe adjustment has to be performed
again on site.
• The default setting for EPD/OED when the devices are delivered is OFF; the function has to be
activated if required.
• The EPD/OED process error can be output by means of the configurable relay outputs.
Performing empty-pipe and full-pipe adjustment (EPD/OED)
"
120
1.
Select the corresponding function in the function matrix:
HOME → F → R → BASIC FUNCTIONS → F → R → PROCESSPARAMETERS →
F → R → ADJUSTMENT → F → EPD/OED ADJUSTMENT
2.
Empty the piping. In case of an EPD adjustment, the wall of the measuring tube should be
wetted with fluid for the adjustment procedure but this is not the case with an OED
adjustment!
3.
Start empty-pipe adjustment: Select "EMPTY PIPE ADJUST" or "OED EMPTY ADJUST" and
press F to confirm.
4.
After empty-pipe adjustment, fill the piping with fluid.
5.
Start full-pipe adjustment: Select "FULL PIPE ADJUST" or "OED FULL ADJUST" and press F
to confirm.
6.
Having completed the adjustment, select the setting "OFF" and exit the function by pressing F.
7.
Now select the "EPD" function (6420). Switch on Empty Pipe Detection by selecting the
following settings:
– EPD → Select ON STANDARD or ON SPECIAL and press F to confirm.
– OED → Select OED and confirm with F.
Caution!
The adjustment coefficients must be valid before you can activate the EPD/OED function. If
adjustment is incorrect the following messages might appear on the display:
• ADJUSTMENT FULL = EMPTY
The adjustment values for empty pipe and full pipe are identical. In such cases, the empty-pipe/
full-pipe adjustment must be repeated!
• ADJUSTMENT NOT OK
Adjustment is not possible because the fluid’s conductivity is out of range.
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Commissioning
6.10
Data storage device
At Endress+Hauser, the term HistoROM refers to various types of data storage modules on which
process and measuring device data is stored. By plugging and unplugging such modules, device
configurations can be duplicated onto other measuring devices to cite just one example.
6.10.1
HistoROM/S-DAT (Sensor DAT)
The S-DAT is an exchangeable data storage device in which all sensor relevant parameters are
stored, i.e., diameter, serial number, calibration factor, zero point.
6.10.2
HistoROM/T-DAT (Transmitter DAT)
The T-DAT is an exchangeable data storage device in which all transmitter parameters and settings
are stored.
Storing of specific parameter settings from the device memory (EEPROM) to the T-DAT module and
vice versa has to be carried out by the user (= manual save function). Detailed information about
the procedure → ä 90
6.10.3
"
Endress+Hauser
F-CHIP (Function Chip)
The F-Chip is a microprocessor chip that contains additional software packages that extend the
functionality and application possibilities of the transmitter.
In the case of a later upgrade, the F-CHIP can be ordered as an accessory and can simply be plugged
on to the I/O board. After start up, the software is immediately made available to the transmitter.
Accessories → ä 123
Plugging on to the I/O board → ä 141
Caution!
To ensure an unambiguous assignment, the F-CHIP is coded with the transmitter serial number
once it is plugged in. Thus, it can not be reused with other measuring devices.
121
Maintenance
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
7
Maintenance
No special maintenance work is required.
7.1
Exterior cleaning
When cleaning the exterior of measuring devices, always use cleaning agents that do not attack the
surface of the housing and the seals.
7.2
Seals
The seals of the Promag H sensor must be replaced cyclically, particularly in the case of molded seals
(aseptic version). The period between changes depends on the frequency of cleaning cycles, the
cleaning temperature and the fluid temperature.
Replacement seals (accessories) → ä 123
122
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Accessories
8
Accessories
Various accessories, which can be ordered separately from Endress+Hauser, are available for the
transmitter and the sensor. The Endress+Hauser service organization can provide detailed
information on the order code of your choice.
8.1
Device-specific accessories
Accessory
Description
Order code
Transmitter for replacement or for stock. Use the order
code to define the following specifications:
53XXX - XXXXX * * * * * * * *
Promag 53 transmitter
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Approvals
Degree of protection / version
Cable type for the remote version
Cable entries
Display / power supply / operation
Software
Outputs / inputs
Conversion kit for
inputs/outputs
(PROFIBUS DP only)
Conversion kit with appropriate slot modules for converting DKUI - * *
the present input/output configuration to a new version.
Software packages for
Promag 53
(PROFIBUS DP only)
Software add-ons on F-CHIP, can be ordered individually:
– Electrode Cleaning Circuitry (ECC)
– Batching
8.2
DK5SO - *
Measuring principle-specific accessories
Accessory
Description
Order code
Mounting kit for
Promag 53 transmitter
Mounting kit for wall-mounted housing (remote version).
Suitable for:
• Wall mounting
• Pipe mounting
• Panel mounting
DK5WM - *
Mounting set for aluminum housings. Suitable for:
• Pipe mounting
Endress+Hauser
Cable for remote version
Coil and signal cables, various lengths. Reinforced cable
on request.
DK5CA - * *
Ground cable for
Promag W/P
A set consists of two ground cables.
DK5GC - * * *
Ground disk for
Promag W/P
Ground disk for potential matching
DK5GD * * *
Mounting kit for Promag H
Mounting kit for Promag H, comprising:
– 2 process connections
– Screws
– Seals
DKH * * - * * * *
Adapter connection for
Promag A, H
Adapter connections for installing Promag 53 H instead of DK5HA - * * * * * *
Promag 30/33 A or Promag 30/33 H DN 25.
Ground rings for Promag H If the process connections are made of PVC or PVDF,
ground rings are necessary to ensure that potential is
matched. A set comprises 2 ground rings.
DK5HR - * * * *
Set of seals for Promag H
For regular replacement of the seals of the Promag H
sensor.
DK5HS - * * *
Wall-mounting kit for
Promag H
Wall-mounting kit for the Promag H sensor.
DK5HM - * *
Welding jig for Promag H
Weld nipples as process connection:
Welding jig for installation in pipes.
DK5HW - * * *
123
Accessories
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
8.3
124
Service-specific accessories
Accessory
Description
Order code
Applicator
Software for selecting and configuring flowmeters.
Applicator can be downloaded from the Internet or
ordered on CD-ROM for installation on a local PC.
Contact your
Endress+Hauser representative for more information.
DKA80 - *
Fieldcheck
Tester/simulator for testing flowmeters in the field.
When used in conjunction with the "FieldCare" software
package, test results can be imported into a database,
printed and used for official certification.
Contact your Endress+Hauser representative for more
information.
50098801
FieldCare
FieldCare is Endress+Hauser's FDT-based plant Asset
Management Tool. It can configure all the intelligent
field units in your system and helps you manage these
units. By providing status information, it is also a simple
but effective method of controlling the units' status.
See the product page on the
Endress+Hauser website:
www.endress.com
FXA193
The FXA193 service interface connects the device to the
PC for configuration via FieldCare.
FXA193 – *
Memograph M graphic
display recorder
RSG40-************
The Memograph M graphic display recorder provides
information on all the relevant process variables.
Measured values are recorded correctly, limit values are
monitored and measuring points analyzed. The data are
stored in the 256 MB internal memory and also on a
DSD card or USB stick.
Memograph M boasts a modular design, intuitive
operation and a comprehensive security concept. The
ReadWin® 2000 PC software is part of the standard
package and is used for configuring, visualizing and
archiving the data captured.
The mathematics channels which are optionally available
enable continuous monitoring of specific power
consumption, boiler efficiency and other parameters
which are important for efficient energy management.
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Troubleshooting
9
Troubleshooting
9.1
Troubleshooting instructions
Always start troubleshooting with the following checklist if faults occur after commissioning or
during operation. The routine takes you directly to the cause of the problem and the appropriate
remedial measures.
Check the display
No display visible and no
output signals present.
1. Check the supply voltage → Terminals 1, 2
2. Check device fuse → ä 147
85 to 260 V AC: 0.8 A slow-blow / 250 V
20 to 55 V AC and 16 to 62 V DC: 2 A slow-blow / 250 V
3. Measuring electronics defective → order spare parts → ä 141
No display visible, but
output signals are present.
1. Check whether the ribbon-cable connector of the display module is correctly plugged
into the amplifier board → ä 141
2. Display module defective → order spare parts → ä 141
3. Measuring electronics defective → order spare parts → ä 141
Display texts are in a
foreign language.
Switch off power supply. Press and hold down both the OS keys and switch on the
measuring device. The display text will appear in English (default) and is displayed at
maximum contrast.
Measured value indicated,
but no signal at the current
or pulse output
Measuring electronics defective → order spare parts → ä 141
▼
Error messages on display
Errors which occur during commissioning or measuring operation are displayed immediately. Error messages consist of a
variety of icons. The meanings of these icons are as follows (example):
–
–
–
–
–
Error type: S = system error, P = process error
Error message type: $ = fault message, ! = notice message
EMPTY TUBE = Type of error, e.g. measuring tube is only partly filled or completely empty
03:00:05 = duration of error occurrence (in hours, minutes and seconds)
#401 = error number
"
Caution!
• Also refer to the information on → ä 68
• The measuring system interprets simulations and positive zero return as system errors, but displays them as notice
messages only.
System error (device error) has occurred→ ä 127
Process error (application error) has occurred→ ä 136
▼
Faulty connection to control system
No connection can be made between the control system and the device.
Check the following points:
Supply voltage Transmitter
Check the Supply voltage → Terminals 1/2
Device fuse
Check device fuse → ä 147
85 to 260 V AC: 0.8 A slow-blow / 250 V
20 to 55 V AC and 16 to 62 V DC: 2 A slow-blow / 250 V
Fieldbus connection
PROFIBUS PA: Check data line
Terminal 26 = PA +
Terminal 27 = PA PROFIBUS DP: Check data line
Terminal 26 = B (RxD/TxD-P)
Terminal 27 = A (RxD/TxD-N)
▼
Endress+Hauser
125
Troubleshooting
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Faulty connection to control system (continued)
Fieldbus connector
(only for PROFIBUS PA)
• Check pin assignment/wiring
• Check connection between connector/fieldbus port.
Is the coupling ring tightened correctly?
Fieldbus voltage
(only for PROFIBUS PA)
Check that a min. bus voltage of 9 V DC is present at terminals 26/27. Permissible range: 9
to 32 V DC
Network structure
Check permissible fieldbus length and number of spurs.
Basic current
(only for PROFIBUS PA)
Is there a basic current of min. 11 mA?
Bus address
Check bus address: make sure there are no double assignments
Bus termination
Has the PROFIBUS network been terminated correctly?
Each bus segment must always be terminated with a bus terminator at both ends (start and
finish). Otherwise there may be interference in communication.
Power consumption,
permitted feed current
(only for PROFIBUS PA)
Check the current consumption of the bus segment:
The current consumption of the bus segment in question (= total of basic currents of all bus
users) must not exceed the max. permissible feed current of the bus power supply.
▼
System or process error messages
System or process errors which occur during commissioning or operation can also be displayed in the manufacturerspecific device controls using the FieldCare operating program.
▼
Other error (without error message)
Other errors are present
126
Diagnosis and rectification → ä 139
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Troubleshooting
9.2
System error messages
Serious system errors are always recognized by the measuring device as a "fault message" and
shown as a lightning flash symbol ($) on the display! Fault messages immediately affect the inputs
and outputs. Simulations and positive zero return, on the other hand, are classed and displayed as
"Notice messages".
"
!
Caution!
In the event of a serious fault, a flowmeter might have to be returned to the manufacturer for repair.
Important procedures must be carried out before you return a flowmeter to Endress+Hauser
→ ä 150.
Always enclose a duly completed "Declaration of contamination" form. You will find a preprinted
blank of this form at the back of this manual.
Note!
• The error types listed in the following correspond to the factory settings.
• See the information on → ä 68
9.2.1
Displaying the device status on PROFIBUS DP/PA
Display in the operating program (acyclic data transmission)
The device status can be queried using an operating program (e.g. FieldCare):
Function block SUPERVISION → SYSTEM → OPERATION → ACTUAL SYSTEM CONDITION
Display in the PROFIBUS master system (cyclic data transmission)
If the AI or TOTAL modules are configured for cyclic data transmission, the device status is coded
in accordance with PROFIBUS Profile Specification 3.0 and transmitted with the measured value to
the PROFIBUS master by means of the quality byte (byte 5). The quality byte is split into the "quality
status", "quality substatus" and "limits" segments.
Measuring value
Quality
Code
Byte 5
Quality
Status
Quality Substatus
Limits
a0002707-en
Fig. 65:
Structure of the quality byte
The content of the quality byte depends on the failsafe mode error behavior configured in the
corresponding Analog Input function block. Depending on which failsafe mode has been set in the
FAILSAFE_TYPE function, the following status information is transmitted to the PROFIBUS master
via the quality byte:
• For the selection FAILSAFE_TYPE → FSAFE VALUE :
Endress+Hauser
Quality code (HEX)
Quality status
Quality substatus
Limits
0x48
0x49
0x4A
UNCERTAIN
Substitute set
OK
Low
High
127
Troubleshooting
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
• For the selection FAILSAFE_TYPE → LAST GOOD VALUE (factory setting):
If a valid output value was available before the failure:
Quality code (HEX)
Quality status
Quality substatus
Limits
0x44
0x45
0x46
UNCERTAIN
Last usable value
OK
Low
High
If no valid output value was available before the failure:
Quality code (HEX)
Quality status
Quality substatus
Limits
0x4C
0x4D
0x4E
UNCERTAIN
Initial Value
OK
Low
High
• For FAILSAFE_TYPE → WRONG VALUE:
For status information, see the table in the following section.
9.2.2
List of system error messages
Limits
Quality substatus
Device status message
(local display)
Quality status
No.
Quality code (HEX)
Measured value status
PROFIBUS measured value status
Extended
diagnostic
message in the
PROFIBUS
master
Cause/remedy
(Spare parts → ä 141)
Depicted on the local display:
S = System error
$ = Fault message (with an effect on the inputs and outputs)
! = Notice message (without any effect on the inputs and outputs)
No. # 0xx → Hardware error
001
S: CRITICAL FAILURE
$: # 001
0x0F
BAD
Device Failure
Constant
ROM/RAM
failure
Cause:
ROM/RAM error. Error when accessing the
program memory (ROM) or random access
memory (RAM) of the processor.
Remedy:
Replace the amplifier board.
011
S: AMP HW EEPROM
$: # 011
0x0F
BAD
Device Failure
Constant
Amplifier EEPROM Cause:
failure
Amplifier with faulty EEPROM
Remedy:
Replace the amplifier board.
128
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Troubleshooting
S: AMP SW EEPROM
$: # 012
Limits
012
Quality substatus
Device status message
(local display)
Quality status
No.
Quality code (HEX)
Measured value status
PROFIBUS measured value status
0x0F
BAD
Device Failure
Constant
Extended
diagnostic
message in the
PROFIBUS
master
Cause/remedy
(Spare parts → ä 141)
Amplifier EEPROM Cause:
data inconsistent
Error when accessing data of the measuring
amplifier EEPROM
Remedy:
The EEPROM data blocks in which an error has
occurred are displayed in the
TROUBLESHOOTING function (No. 8047).
1. Press Enter to acknowledge the errors in
question; default values are automatically
inserted instead of the faulty parameter values.
2. The measuring device must be restarted after
fault elimination.
Access:
SUPERVISION → SYSTEM → OPERATION →
SYSTEM RESET (→ RESTART)
031
S: SENSOR HW DAT
$: # 031
0x10
0x11
0x12
BAD
Sensor Failure
O.K.
Low
High
S-DAT failure /
Cause:
S-DAT not inserted 1. S-DAT is not correctly plugged into the
amplifier board (or is missing).
2. S-DAT is defective.
Remedy:
1. Check whether the S-DAT is correctly plugged
into the amplifier board.
032
S: SENSOR SW DAT
$: # 032
0x10
0x11
0x12
BAD
Sensor Failure
O.K.
Low
High
S-DAT data
inconsistent
2. Replace the S-DAT if it is defective.
Check whether the new replacement DAT is
compatible with the existing electronics.
Check the:
- Spare part set number
- Hardware revision code
3. Replace measuring electronics boards if
necessary.
4. Plug the S-DAT into the amplifier board.
041
S: TRANSM. HW-DAT
$: # 041
0x0F
BAD
Device Failure
Constant
T-DAT failure
Cause:
1. T-DAT is not correctly plugged into the
amplifier board (or is missing).
2. T-DAT is defective.
Remedy:
1. Check whether the T-DAT is correctly plugged
into the amplifier board.
042
S: TRANSM. SW-DAT
$: # 042
0x0F
BAD
Device Failure
Constant
T-DAT data
inconsistent
2. Replace the T-DAT if it is defective.
Check whether the new replacement DAT is
compatible with the existing electronics.
Check the:
- Spare part set number
- Hardware revision code
3. Replace measuring electronics boards if
necessary.
4. Plug the T-DAT into the amplifier board.
Endress+Hauser
129
Troubleshooting
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
S: HW F-CHIP
$: # 061
Limits
061
Quality substatus
Device status message
(local display)
Quality status
No.
Quality code (HEX)
Measured value status
PROFIBUS measured value status
0x0F
BAD
Device Failure
Constant
Extended
diagnostic
message in the
PROFIBUS
master
F-CHIP defect/not
plugged
Cause/remedy
(Spare parts → ä 141)
Cause:
Transmitter F-Chip:
– F-Chip is defective
– F-Chip is not plugged into the I/O board or is
missing.
Remedy:
1. Replace the F-CHIP.
2.
Plug the F-CHIP into the I/O board.
No. # 1xx → Software error
101
S: GAIN ERROR AMP
$: # 101
0x0F
BAD
Device Failure
Constant
Gain Error
Amplifier
Cause:
Gain deviation compared to reference gain is
greater than 2%.
Remedy:
Replace the amplifier board.
121
S: A/C COMPATIB.
!: # 121
0x0F
BAD
Device Failure
Constant
Amplifier and I/O Cause:
board only partially Due to different software
compatible
versions, I/O board and amplifier board are only
partially compatible (possibly restricted
functionality).
!
Note!
– The indication on the display as notice message
appears only for 30 seconds (with listing in
"Previous system condition" function).
– This condition can occur if only one electronics
board has been exchanged; the extended
software functionality is not available. The
previously existing software functionality is still
working and the measurement possible.
Remedy:
Module with lower software version has either to
be updated by "FieldCare" with the required
software version or the module has to be replaced.
130
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Troubleshooting
Quality substatus
Limits
Device status message
(local display)
Quality status
No.
Quality code (HEX)
Measured value status
PROFIBUS measured value status
Device Failure
Constant
Extended
diagnostic
message in the
PROFIBUS
master
Cause/remedy
(Spare parts → ä 141)
No. # 2xx → Error in DAT/no communication
205
S: LOAD T-DAT
!: # 205
0x0F
BAD
Save to T-DAT
failed
Cause:
Data backup (downloading) to T–DAT failed, or
error when accessing (uploading) the calibration
values stored in the T–DAT.
Remedy:
1. Check whether the T-DAT is correctly plugged
into the amplifier board.
206
S: SAVE T-DAT
!: # 206
0x0F
BAD
Device Failure
Constant
Restore from TDAT failed
2. Replace the T-DAT if it is defective.
Before replacing the DAT, check that the new,
replacement DAT is compatible with the
measuring electronics.
Check the:
– Spare part set number
– Hardware revision code
3. Replace measuring electronics boards if
necessary
261
S: COMMUNICAT. I/O
$: # 261
0x18
0x19
0x1A
BAD
No
Communicati
on
O.K.
Low
High
Communication
failure
Cause:
Communication error. No data reception between
amplifier and I/O board or faulty internal data
transfer.
Remedy:
Check whether the electronics boards are correctly
inserted in their holders
No. # 3xx → System limits exceeded
321
S: TOL. COIL CURR.
$: # 321
0x0F
BAD
Device Failure
Constant
Coil current out of
tolerance
Cause:
The coil current of the sensor is out of tolerance.
Remedy:
#
Warning!
Switch off power supply before manipulating the
coil current cable, coil current cable connector or
measuring electronics boards!
Remote version:
1. Check wiring of terminals 41/42 → ä 44
2. Check coil current cable connector.
Compact and remote version:
If the error can not be resolved, please contact your
local Endress+Hauser service organization.
Endress+Hauser
131
Troubleshooting
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
S: STACK CUR OUT n
$: # 339 to 342
Limits
339
to
342
Quality substatus
Device status message
(local display)
Quality status
No.
Quality code (HEX)
Measured value status
PROFIBUS measured value status
0x0F
BAD
Device Failure
Constant
Extended
diagnostic
message in the
PROFIBUS
master
Temp. Buf. not
cleared
Cause/remedy
(Spare parts → ä 141)
Cause:
The temporarily buffered flow portions (measuring
mode for pulsating flow) could not be cleared or
output within 60 seconds.
Remedy:
1. Change the upper or lower limit setting, as
applicable.
2.
343
to
346
S: STACK FREQ. OUT n
$: # 343 to 346
0x0F
BAD
Device Failure
Constant
Temp. Buf. not
cleared
347
to
350
S: STACK PULSE OUT n
!: # 347 to 350
0x0F
BAD
Device Failure
Constant
Temp. Buf. not
cleared
Increase or reduce flow, as applicable.
Recommendation:
– Configure the fault response of the output to
ACTUAL VALUE, so that the temporary buffer
can be cleared.
– Clear the temporary buffer by the measures
described under Item 1.
Cause:
The temporarily buffered flow portions (measuring
mode for pulsating flow) could not be cleared or
output within 60 seconds.
Remedy:
1. Increase the setting for pulse weighting.
2.
Increase the max. pulse frequency, if the
totalizer can handle a higher number of pulses.
3.
Increase or reduce flow, as applicable.
Recommendation:
– Configure the fault response of the output to
ACTUAL VALUE, so that the temporary buffer
can be cleared.
– Clear the temporary buffer by the measures
described under Item 1.
351
to
354
S: CURRENT RANGE n
!: # 351 to 354
0x54
0x55
0x56
UNCERTAIN
Engineering
Unit Range
Violation
O.K.
Low
High
Flow is Out of
Range
Cause:
Current output: The actual value for the flow lies
outside the set limits.
Remedy:
1. Change the upper or lower limit setting, as
applicable.
2.
355
to
358
S: FREQ. RANGE n
!: # 355 to 358
0x54
0x55
0x56
UNCERTAIN
Engineering
Unit Range
Violation
O.K.
Low
High
Flow is Out of
Range
Increase or reduce flow, as applicable.
Cause:
Frequency output: The actual value for the flow lies
outside the set limits.
Remedy:
1. Change the upper or lower limit setting, as
applicable.
2.
132
Increase or reduce flow, as applicable.
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Troubleshooting
S: PULSE RANGE
!: # 359 to 362
0x54
0x55
0x56
UNCERTAIN
Limits
359
to
362
Quality substatus
Device status message
(local display)
Quality status
No.
Quality code (HEX)
Measured value status
PROFIBUS measured value status
Engineering
Unit Range
Violation
O.K.
Low
High
Extended
diagnostic
message in the
PROFIBUS
master
Flow is Out of
Range
Cause/remedy
(Spare parts → ä 141)
Cause:
Pulse output: The pulse output frequency is out of
range.
Remedy:
1. Increase the setting for pulse weighting.
2. When selecting the pulse width, choose a
value that can still be processed by a connected
counter (e.g. mechanical counter, PLC, etc.).
Determine the pulse width:
– Version 1: Enter the minimum duration that
a pulse must be present at the connected
counter to ensure its registration.
– Variant 2: Enter the maximum (pulse)
frequency as the half "reciprocal value" that
a pulse must be present at the connected
counter to ensure its registration.
Example:
The maximum input frequency of the
connected counter is 10 Hz. The pulse width
to be entered is:
1
= 50 ms
2.10 Hz
a0004437
3. Reduce flow
No. # 5xx → Application error
501
502
S: SW.-UPDATE ACT.
!: # 501
S: UP-/DOWNLO. ACT.
!: # 502
0x48
0x49
0x4A
0x48
0x49
0x4A
UNCERTAIN
UNCERTAIN
Substitute set
(Substitute set
of failsafe
status)
O.K.
Low
High
Substitute set
(Substitute set
of failsafe
status)
O.K.
Low
High
New amplifier
software loaded
Cause:
New amplifier or communication software version
is loaded. Currently no other functions are possible.
Remedy:
Wait until process is finished. The device will
restart automatically.
Upload/download
of device data
active
Cause:
Up- or downloading the device data via
configuration program. Currently no other
functions are possible.
Remedy:
Wait until process is finished.
Endress+Hauser
133
Troubleshooting
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
P: RUN BATCHING
!: # 571
Limits
571
Quality substatus
Device status message
(local display)
Quality status
No.
Quality code (HEX)
Measured value status
PROFIBUS measured value status
0x80
GOOD
O.K.
O.K.
Extended
diagnostic
message in the
PROFIBUS
master
Batch running
Cause/remedy
(Spare parts → ä 141)
Cause:
Batching is started and active (valves are open)
Remedy:
No measures needed (during the batching process
some other functions may not be activated).
572
P: HOLD BATCHING
!: # 572
0x80
GOOD
O.K.
O.K.
Batch hold
Cause:
Batching has been interrupted (valves are closed)
Remedy:
Using either:
• PROFIBUS DP/PA
• Local display:
– Continue batching with "GO ON".
– Interrupt batching with "STOP".
No. # 6xx → Simulation mode active
601
S: POS. ZERO-RETURN
! # 601
0x53
UNCERTAIN
Sensor
conversion
not accurate
(measured
value from
sensor not
accurate)
Constant
Positive zero return Cause:
active
Positive zero return is active.
!
Note!
This message has the highest display priority!
Remedy:
Switch off positive zero return.
Access:
BASIC FUNCTION → SYSTEM PARAMETER →
CONFIGURATION → POS. ZERO RETURN (→
OFF)
611
to
614
S: SIM. CURR. OUT. n
!: # 611 to 614
621
to
624
S: SIM. FREQ. OUT. n
!: # 621 to 624
631
to
634
S: SIM. PULSE n
!: # 631 to 634
641
to
644
S: SIM. STAT. OUT n
!: # 641 to 644
134
0x80
GOOD
O.K.
O.K.
Simulation IO
active
Cause:
Simulation current output is active.
Remedy:
Switch off simulation.
0x80
GOOD
O.K.
O.K.
Simulation IO
active
Cause:
Simulation frequency output is active.
Remedy:
Switch off simulation.
0x80
GOOD
O.K.
O.K.
Simulation IO
active
Cause:
Simulation pulse output is active.
Remedy:
Switch off simulation.
0x80
GOOD
O.K.
O.K.
Simulation IO
active
Cause:
Simulation status output is active.
Remedy:
Switch off simulation.
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Troubleshooting
S: SIM. RELAY n
!: # 651 to 654
671
to
674
S: SIM. STATUS IN n
!: # 671 to 674
691
S: SIM. FAILSAFE
!: # 691
Limits
651
to
654
Quality substatus
Device status message
(local display)
Quality status
No.
Quality code (HEX)
Measured value status
PROFIBUS measured value status
0x80
GOOD
O.K.
O.K.
Extended
diagnostic
message in the
PROFIBUS
master
Simulation IO
active
Cause/remedy
(Spare parts → ä 141)
Cause:
Simulation relay output is active.
Remedy:
Switch off simulation.
0x80
GOOD
O.K.
O.K.
Simulation IO
active
Cause:
Simulation status output is active.
Remedy:
Switch off simulation.
0x48
0x49
0x4A
UNCERTAIN
Substitute set
(Substitute set
of failsafe
status)
O.K.
Low
High
Simulation failsafe
active
Cause:
Simulation of failsafe mode (outputs) is active.
Remedy:
Switch off simulation.
Access:
SUPERVISION → SYSTEM → OPERATION →
SIM. FAILSAFE MODE (→ OFF)
692
S: SIM. MEASURAND
!: # 692
0x60
0x61
0x62
UNCERTAIN
Simulated
Value
(manually
specified
value)
O.K.
Low
High
Simulation
measured value
active
Cause:
Simulation of the measured value is active.
Remedy:
Switch off simulation.
Access:
SUPERVISION → SYSTEM → OPERATION →
SIM. MEASURAND (→ OFF)
698
S: DEV. TEST ACT.
!: # 698
Endress+Hauser
0x60
0x61
0x62
UNCERTAIN
Simulated
Value
(manually
specified
value)
O.K.
Low
High
Device test via
Fieldcheck active
Cause:
The measuring device is being checked on site via
the test and simulation device.
135
Troubleshooting
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
9.3
!
Process error messages
Note!
Also note the versions on → ä 68 and → ä 140.
9.3.1
Displaying the device status on PROFIBUS DP/PA
For more information, refer to → ä 127
9.3.2
List of process error messages
Limits
Quality substatus
Device status message
(local display)
Quality status
No.
Quality code (HEX)
Measured value status
PROFIBUS measured value status
Extended
diagnostic
message in the
PROFIBUS
master
Cause/remedy
P = Process error
$ = Fault message (with an effect on the inputs and outputs)
! = Notice message (without any effect on the inputs and outputs)
401
P: EMPTY PIPE
$: # 401
0x03
BAD
Non specific
(uncertain
status)
Constant
Empty Pipe
detected
Cause:
Measuring tube partially filled or empty.
Remedy:
1. Check the process conditions of the plant.
2.
461
P: ADJ N. OK
!: # 461
0x40
0x41
0x42
UNCERT
AIN
Non specific
(uncertain
status)
O.K.
Low
High
EPD adjustment
not possible
Fill the measuring tube.
Cause:
EPD/OED adjustment not possible because the fluid's
conductivity is either too low or too high.
Remedy:
The EPD/OED function cannot be used with fluids of
this nature.
463
P: FULL = EMPTY
$: # 463
0x40
0x41
0x42
UNCERT
AIN
Non specific
(uncertain
status)
O.K.
Low
High
EPD adjustment
wrong
Cause:
The EPD/OED adjustment values for empty pipe and
full pipe are identical, therefore incorrect.
Remedy:
Repeat adjustment, making sure procedure is correct.
→ ä 120
136
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Troubleshooting
P: > BATCH TIME
$: # 471
0x00
0x01
0x02
BAD
Limits
471
Quality substatus
Device status message
(local display)
Quality status
No.
Quality code (HEX)
Measured value status
PROFIBUS measured value status
Non specific
(uncertain
status)
O.K.
Low
High
Extended
diagnostic
message in the
PROFIBUS
master
Batch Time
Cause/remedy
Cause:
The maximum permitted batching time was exceeded.
Remedy:
1. Increase flow rate.
2. Check valve (opening).
3. Adjust time setting to changed batch quantity.
!
Note!
If the errors listed above occur, these are displayed in
the Home position flashing continuously.
• General:
These error messages can be reset by configuring
any batching parameter. It is sufficient to confirm
with the OS key and then the F key.
• Batching via status input:
The error message can be reset by means of a pulse.
Another pulse then restarts the batching.
• Batching via operating keys (soft keys)
The error message is reset by pressing the START
key. Pressing the START key a second time starts
the batching process.
• Batching via the BATCHING PROCESS function
(7260):
The error message can be reset by pressing the
STOP, START, HOLD or GO ON keys. Pressing the
START key a second time starts the batching
process.
472
P: >< BATCH
QUANTITY
$: # 472
0x00
0x01
0x02
BAD
Non specific
(uncertain
status)
O.K.
Low
High
Batch Quantity
Cause:
EPD calibration not possible as the fluid conductivity is
either too low or too high.
– Underbatching:
The minimum quantity was not reached.
– Overbatching:
The maximum permitted batching quantity was
exceeded.
Remedy:
Underbatching:
1. Increase fixed correction quantity.
2. If the batching quantity changes, the minimum
batching quantity must be adjusted.
Overbatching:
1. Reduce fixed correction quantity.
2. If the batching quantity changes, the maximum
batching quantity must be adjusted.
!
Note!
Please observe Note in error message No. 471
Endress+Hauser
137
Troubleshooting
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
P: PROGRESS NOTE
$: # 473
Limits
473
Quality substatus
Device status message
(local display)
Quality status
No.
Quality code (HEX)
Measured value status
PROFIBUS measured value status
0x80
GOOD
O.K.
O.K.
Extended
diagnostic
message in the
PROFIBUS
master
Progress Note
Cause/remedy
Cause:
End of filling process approaching.
The running filling process has exceeded the
predefined batch quantity point for the display warning
message.
Remedy:
No measures required (if necessary prepare to replace
container).
474
P: MAX. FLOW RATE
!: # 474
0x00
0x01
0x02
BAD
Non specific
(uncertain
status)
O.K.
Low
High
Flow Rate
Cause:
Maximum flow value entered is
exceeded.
Remedy:
Reduce the flow value.
!
Note!
Please observe Note in error message No. 471
138
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Troubleshooting
9.4
Symptoms
Process errors without messages
Rectification
!
Note!
You may have to change or correct certain settings of the function matrix in order to rectify faults. The functions outlined below, such as DISPLAY DAMPING, for
example, are described in detail in the "Description of Device Functions" manual.
Flow values are negative, even though
the fluid is flowing forwards through
the pipe.
1.
Remote version:
– Switch off the power supply and check the wiring → ä 40
– If necessary, reverse the connections at terminals 41 and 42
2.
Change the setting in the INSTALLATION DIRECTION SENSOR function accordingly
Measured value reading fluctuates even 1.
though flow is steady.
2.
Check grounding and potential matching. → ä 56
The medium is too inhomogeneous. Check the following medium characteristics:
– Gas bubble percentage too high?
– Solids percentage too high?
– Conductivity fluctuations too high?
3.
SYSTEM DAMPING function → increase value (→ BASIC FUNCTION/SYSTEMPARAMETER/CONFIGURATION)
4.
TIME CONSTANT function → increase the value (→ OUTPUTS/CURRENT OUTPUT/CONFIGURATION)
5.
DISPLAY DAMPING function → increase the value (→ USER INTERFACE/CONTROL/BASIC CONFIGURATION)
Measured-value reading or measuredvalue output pulsates or fluctuates, e.g.
because of reciprocating pump,
peristaltic pump, diaphragm pump or
pump with similar delivery
characteristic.
Perform the "Pulsating Flow" Quick Setup (only possible if a pulse/frequency output is available
). → ä 82
If the problem persists despite these measures, a pulsation damper will have to be installed between pump and measuring
device.
There are differences between the
flowmeter's internal totalizer and the
external metering device.
This symptom is due primarily to backflow in the piping because the pulse output cannot subtract in the STANDARD or
SYMMETRY measuring modes.
The problem can be solved as follows:
Allow for flow in both directions. Set the MEASURING MODE function to PULSATING FLOW for the pulse output in
question.
Measured value reading shown on
1.
display, even though the fluid is at a
2.
standstill and the measuring tube is full.
3.
Measured-value reading on display,
even though measuring tube is empty.
Check grounding and potential matching → ä 56
Check the fluid for presence of gas bubbles.
Activate the ON-VALUE LOW FLOW CUT OFF function, i.e. enter or increase the value for the low flow cut off (→
BASIC FUNCTIONS / PROCESS PARAMETERS / CONFIGURATION).
1.
Perform empty-pipe/full-pipe adjustment and then switch on Empty Pipe Detection → ä 120
2.
Remote version:
Check the terminals of the EPD cable → ä 44
3.
Fill the measuring tube.
The current output signal is
always 4 mA, irrespective of the flow
signal at any given time.
Value for creepage too high:
Reduce the corresponding value in the ON-VALUE LOW FLOW CUT OFF function.
The fault cannot be rectified or some
other fault not described above has
occurred.
In these instances, please contact your
Endress+Hauser service organization.
The following options are available for tackling problems of this nature:
• Request the services of an Endress+Hauser service technician
If you contact our service organization to have a service technician sent out, please be ready to quote the following
information:
– Brief description of the fault
– Nameplate specifications: order code, serial number → ä 7
• Returning devices to Endress+Hauser
The required procedures must be carried out before you return a flowmeter requiring repair or calibration to
Endress+Hauser. → ä 150
Always enclose a duly completed "Declaration of contamination" form with the flowmeter. You will find a preprinted
form at the back of this Operating Manual.
• Replace transmitter electronics
Components in the measuring electronics defective → order spare parts → ä 141
Endress+Hauser
139
Troubleshooting
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
9.5
!
Failsafe mode of outputs
Note!
The failsafe mode of the current, pulse and frequency outputs can be customized by means of
various functions in the function matrix. You will find detailed information on these procedures in
the "Description of Device Functions" manual.
You can use positive zero return to reset the signals of the current, pulse and frequency outputs to
their fallback value, or reset measured value transmission via fieldbus to "0", for example when
measuring has to be interrupted while a pipe is being cleaned. This function takes priority over all
other device functions. Simulations, for example, are suppressed.
Failsafe mode of outputs
System/process error is present
Positive zero return is activated
"
Caution!
System or process errors defined as "Notice messages" have no effect whatsoever on the inputs and outputs. See the information on → ä 68
Current output
MINIMUM VALUE
0–20 mA → 0 mA
4–20 mA → 2 mA
4–20 mA NAMUR →3.5 mA
4–20 mA US → 3.75 mA
0–20 mA (25 mA) → 0 mA
4–20 mA (25 mA) → 2 mA
Output signal corresponds to "zero flow"
MAXIMUM VALUE
0–20 mA → 22 mA
4–20 mA → 22 mA
4–20 mA NAMUR → 22.6 mA
4–20 mA US → 22.6 mA
0–20 mA (25 mA) → 25 mA
4–20 mA (25 mA) → 25 mA
HOLD VALUE
Last valid value (preceding occurrence of the fault) is output.
ACTUAL VALUE
Fault is ignored, i.e. normal measured-value output on the basis of ongoing flow
measurement.
Pulse output
FALLBACK VALUE
Signal output → no pulses
Output signal corresponds to "zero flow"
HOLD VALUE
Last valid value (preceding occurrence of the fault) is output.
ACTUAL VALUE
Fault is ignored, i.e. normal measured-value output on the basis of ongoing flow
measurement.
Frequency output
FALLBACK VALUE
Signal output → 0 Hz
Output signal corresponds to "zero flow"
FAILSAFE LEVEL
Output of the frequency specified in the FAILSAFE VALUE function.
HOLD VALUE
Last valid value (preceding occurrence of the fault) is output.
ACTUAL VALUE
Fault is ignored, i.e. normal measured-value output on the basis of ongoing flow
measurement.
Relay output
In the event of a fault or power supply failure: Relay → deenergized
No effect on relay output
The "Description of Device Functions" manual contains detailed information on relay
switching response for various configurations such as error message, flow direction, EPD,
limit value, etc.
PROFIBUS
140
→ ä 127
-
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Troubleshooting
9.6
Spare parts
The previous sections contain a detailed troubleshooting guide → ä 125.
The measuring device, moreover, provides additional support in the form of continuous selfdiagnosis and error messages.
Fault rectification can entail replacing defective components with tested spare parts. The illustration
below shows the available scope of spare parts.
!
Note!
You can order spare parts directly from your Endress+Hauser service organization by providing the
serial number printed on the transmitter's nameplate → ä 7.
Spare parts are shipped as sets comprising the following parts:
• Spare part
• Additional parts, small items (screws etc.)
• Mounting instructions
• Packaging
9.6.1
PROFIBUS DP
1
2
3
7
T
PU
3
UT
T/O
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
6
PU
IN
T
PU
4
4
UT
T/O
PU
IN
8
5
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
9
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
8
a0004782
Fig. 66:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Endress+Hauser
Spare parts for PROFIBUS DP transmitters (field and wall-mount housing)
Power unit board (85 to 260 V AC, 20 to 55 V AC, 16 to 62 V DC)
Amplifier board
I/O board (COM module), flexible
Pluggable input/output submodules; ordering structure → ä 123
I/O board (COM module), permanent assignment
S-DAT (sensor data storage device)
T-DAT (transmitter data storage device)
F-CHIP (function chip for optional software)
Display module
141
Troubleshooting
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
9.6.2
PROFIBUS PA
8
1
2
3
4
7
5
6
a0004780
Fig. 67:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
142
Spare parts for PROFIBUS PA transmitters (field and wall-mount housing)
Power unit board (85 to 260 V AC, 20 to 55 V AC, 16 to 62 V DC)
Amplifier board
I/O board (COM module), permanent assignment
S-DAT (sensor data storage device)
T-DAT (transmitter data storage device)
F-CHIP (function chip for optional software)
Display module
Fieldbus connector consisting of protection cap, connector, adapter PG 13.5/M20.5
(only for PROFIBUS-PA, order No. 50098037)
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Troubleshooting
9.6.3
Removing and installing printed circuit boards
Field housing
#
"
Warning!
• Risk of electric shock. Exposed components carry dangerous voltages. Make sure that the power
supply is switched off before you remove the cover of the electronics compartment.
• Risk of damaging electronic components (ESD protection). Static electricity can damage electronic
components or impair their operability. Use a workplace with a grounded working surface
purpose-built for electrostatically sensitive devices!
• If you cannot guarantee that the dielectric strength of the device is maintained in the following
steps, then an appropriate inspection must be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer’s
specifications.
• When connecting Ex-certified devices, see the notes and diagrams in the Ex-specific supplement
to this Operating Manual.
Caution!
Use only original Endress+Hauser parts.
Installing and removing the circuit boards → å 68:
1.
2.
Unscrew cover of the electronics compartment from the transmitter housing.
Remove the local display (1) as follows:
– Press in the latches (1.1) at the side and remove the display module.
– Disconnect the ribbon cable (1.2) of the display module from the amplifier board.
3.
Remove the screws and remove the cover (2) from the electronics compartment.
4.
Remove power unit board (4) and I/O board (6):
Insert a thin pin into the hole (3) provided for the purpose and pull the board clear of its holder.
5.
Removing sub-modules (6.2, only for measuring devices with convertible I/O board):
No tools are required for removing the submodules (inputs/outputs) from the I/O board.
Installation is also a no-tools operation.
"
Caution!
Only certain combinations of submodules on the
I/O board are permissible → ä 49.
The individual slots are marked and correspond to certain terminals in the connection
compartment of the transmitter:
– "INPUT / OUTPUT 3" slot = terminals 22/23
– "INPUT / OUTPUT 4" slot = terminals 20/21
Endress+Hauser
6.
Remove amplifier board (5):
– Disconnect the plug of the electrode signal cable (5.1) including S-DAT (5.3) from the board.
– Loosen the plug locking of the coil current cable (5.2) and gently disconnect the plug from
the board, i.e. without moving it back and forward.
– Insert a thin pin into the hole (3) provided for the purpose and pull the board clear of its
holder.
7.
Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure.
143
Troubleshooting
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
3
4
2
5
1
2
3
4
W
E
N
O
4.1
1
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
2
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
W
E
N
O
2
4.4
5.2
W
E
N
O
4.3
T
PU
UT
T/O
PU
IN
T
PU
UT
T/O
PU
IN
3
4
4.2
1.1
5.1
1.2
a0008241
Fig. 68:
1
1.1
1.2
2
3
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
5
5.1
5.2
144
Field housing: removing and installing printed circuit boards
Local display
Screws of electronics compartment cover
Ribbon cable (display module)
Aperture for installing/removing boards
Power unit board
Amplifier board
Electrode signal cable (sensor)
Coil current cable (sensor)
S-DAT (sensor data storage device)
T-DAT (transmitter data storage device)
I/O board (flexible assignment)
F-CHIP (function chip for optional software)
Pluggable sub-modules (current, pulse/frequency and relay output)
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Troubleshooting
Wall-mounted housing
#
"
Warning!
• Risk of electric shock. Exposed components carry dangerous voltages. Make sure that the power
supply is switched off before you remove the cover of the electronics compartment.
• Risk of damaging electronic components (ESD protection). Static electricity can damage electronic
components or impair their operability. Use a workplace with a grounded working surface
purposely built for electrostatically sensitive devices!
• If you cannot guarantee that the dielectric strength of the device is maintained in the following
steps, then an appropriate inspection must be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer’s
specifications.
• When connecting Ex-certified devices, see the notes and diagrams in the Ex-specific supplement
to this Operating Manual.
Caution!
Use only original Endress+Hauser parts.
Installing and removing the circuit boards → å 69: Wall-mount housing
1.
Remove the screws and open the hinged cover (1) of the housing.
2.
Remove the screws securing the electronics module (2). Then push up electronics module and
pull it as far as possible out of the wall-mount housing.
Disconnect the following cable plugs from amplifier board (7):
– Electrode signal cable plug (7.1) including S-DAT (7.3)
– Plug of coil current cable (7.2):
Loosen the plug locking and gently disconnect the plug from the board, i.e. without moving
it back and forward.
– Ribbon cable plug (3) of the display module
3.
4.
Remove the cover (4) from the electronics compartment by loosening the screws.
5.
Remove the boards (6, 7, 8):
(5) Insert a thin pin into the hole provided for the purpose and pull the board clear of its holder.
6.
Removing sub-modules (8.2, only for measuring devices with convertible I/O board):
No tools are required for removing the submodules (inputs/outputs) from the I/O board.
Installation is also a no-tools operation.
"
Caution!
Only certain combinations of submodules on the
I/O board are permissible → ä 49.
The individual slots are marked and correspond to certain terminals in the connection
compartment of the transmitter:
"INPUT / OUTPUT 3" slot = terminals 22/23
"INPUT / OUTPUT 4" slot = terminals 20/21
7.
Endress+Hauser
Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure.
145
Troubleshooting
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
1
2
6
4
3
7
5
7.1
8
7.3
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
5
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
W
E
N
O
1
2
3
4
T
PU
3
8.2
UT
T/O
PU
IN
UT
TP
4
U
7.4
T/O
5
7.2
PU
IN
8.1
3
a0004778
Fig. 69:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
8
8.1
8.2
146
Wall-mount housing: removing and installing printed circuit boards
Housing cover
Electronics module
Ribbon cable (display module)
Screws of electronics compartment cover
Aperture for installing/removing boards
Power unit board
Amplifier board
Electrode signal cable (sensor)
Coil current cable (sensor)
S-DAT (sensor data storage device)
T-DAT (transmitter data storage device)
I/O board (flexible assignment)
F-CHIP (function chip for optional software)
Pluggable sub-modules (current, pulse/frequency and relay output)
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Troubleshooting
9.6.4
#
Replacing the device fuse
Warning!
Risk of electric shock. Exposed components carry dangerous voltages. Make sure that the power
supply is switched off before you remove the cover of the electronics compartment.
The main fuse is on the power unit board → å 70.
The procedure for replacing the fuse is as follows:
"
1.
Switch off power supply.
2.
Remove the power unit board. → ä 143
3.
Remove the protection cap (1) and replace the device fuse (2).
Use only fuses of the following type:
– 20 to 55 V AC / 16 to 62 V DC → 2.0 A slow-blow / 250 V; 5.2 x 20 mm
– Power supply 85 to 260 V AC → 0.8 A slow-blow / 250 V; 5.2 x 20 mm
– Ex-rated devices → see the Ex documentation
4.
Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Caution!
Use only original Endress+Hauser parts.
2
1
a0001148
Fig. 70:
1
2
Endress+Hauser
Replacing the device fuse on the power unit board
Protective cap
Device fuse
147
Troubleshooting
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
9.6.5
Replacing exchangeable measuring electrodes
The Promag W sensor (DN 350 to 2000; 14" to 78") is available with exchangeable measuring
electrodes as an option. This design permits the measuring electrodes to be replaced or cleaned
under process conditions → ä 149.
A
B
3
2
1
4
8
7
11
1
6
10
9
5
a0004447
Fig. 71:
Apparatus for replacing exchangeable measuring electrodes
View A = DN 1200 to 2000 (48" to 78")
View B = DN 350 to 1050 (14" to 42")
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
148
Allen screw
Handle
Electrode cable
Knurled nut (locknut)
Measuring electrode
Stop cock
Retaining cylinder
Locking pin (for handle)
Ball valve housing
Seal (retaining cylinder)
Coil spring
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Troubleshooting
Removing the electrode
Installing the electrode
1st
1st
Loosen the Allen screw (1) and remove the cover.
Insert the new electrode (5) into the retaining
cylinder (7) from below. Make sure that the seals at
the tip of the electrode are clean.
2nd Remove the electrode cable (2) secured to handle (3). 2nd Mount the handle (2) on the electrode and insert the
locking pin (8) to secure it in position.
"
Caution!
Make sure that coil spring (11) is inserted. This is
essential to ensure correct electrical contact and
correct measuring signals.
3rd
Loosen knurled nut (4) by hand. This knurled nut
acts as a locknut.
3rd
Pull the electrode back until the tip of the electrode
no longer protrudes from retaining cylinder (7).
4th
Remove the electrode (5) by turning the handle (2).
The electrode can now be pulled out of the retaining
cylinder (7) as far as a defined stop.
4th
Screw the retaining cylinder (7) onto the ball-valve
housing (9) and tighten it by hand. The seal (10) on
the cylinder must be correctly seated and clean.
#
5.
!
Warning!
Risk of injury. Under process conditions (pressure in
the piping system) the electrode can recoil suddenly
against its stop. Apply counter-pressure while
releasing the electrode.
Note!
Make sure that the rubber hoses on the retaining
cylinder (7) and stop cock (6) are of the same color
(red or blue).
Close the stop cock (6) after pulling out the electrode 5.
as far as it will go.
Open the stop cock (6) and turn the handle (2) to
screw the electrode all the way into the retaining
cylinder.
#
Warning!
Do not subsequently open the stop cock, in order to
prevent fluid escaping.
6.
Remove the electrode complete with
retaining cylinder (7).
6.
Screw the knurled nut (4) onto the
retaining cylinder. This firmly locates the electrode in
position.
7.
Remove the handle (2) from the electrode (5) by
7.
pressing out the locking pin (8). Take care not to lose
the coil spring (11).
Use the Allen screw to secure the electrode cable (3)
to the handle (2).
Remove the old electrode and insert the new
electrode. Replacement electrodes can be ordered
separately from Endress+Hauser.
Reinstall the cover and tighten the Allen screw (1).
8.
Endress+Hauser
8.
"
Caution!
Make sure that the machine screw securing the
electrode cable is firmly tightened. This is essential to
ensure correct electrical contact and correct
measuring signals.
149
Troubleshooting
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
9.7
"
Return
Caution!
Do not return a measuring device if you are not absolutely certain that all traces of hazardous
substances have been removed, e.g. substances which have penetrated crevices or diffused through
plastic.
Costs incurred for waste disposal and injury (burns, etc.) due to inadequate cleaning will be charged
to the owner-operator.
The following steps must be taken before returning a flow measuring device to Endress+Hauser,
e.g. for repair or calibration:
• Always enclose a duly completed "Declaration of contamination" form. Only then can
Endress+Hauser transport, examine and repair a returned device.
• Enclose special handling instructions if necessary, for example a safety data sheet as per
EC REACH Regulation No. 1907/2006.
• Remove all residues. Pay special attention to the grooves for seals and crevices which could
contain residues. This is particularly important if the substance is hazardous to health, e.g.
flammable, toxic, caustic, carcinogenic, etc.
!
Note!
You will find a preprinted "Declaration of contamination" form at the back of these Operating
Instructions.
9.8
Disposal
Observe the regulations applicable in your country!
9.9
SoftwareHistory
Date
Software version
Changes to software
Operating Manual
06.2010
PROFIBUS DP/PA
3.06.XX
Software adjustmen
71116500/06.10
08.2007
PROFIBUS PA
3.04.XX
Introduction of a new PROFIBUS PA I/O board
71060107/08.07
07.2007
PROFIBUS DP
3.04.XX
Software adjustment
10.2006
PROFIBUS DP
3.04.00
Software adjustment
PROFIBUS DP
3.01.XX
Introduction of a new
PROFIBUS DP I/O-board:
– Support of additional output signals (current,
frequency etc.)
12.2005
10.2005
50099246/10.05
Software expansion:
– Batching
150
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Troubleshooting
Date
Software version
Changes to software
Operating Manual
03.2005
PROFIBUS PA
2.03.XX
Software expansion:
– New, improved functions
50099246/10.03
New functions:
– DEVICE SOFTWARE → Display of the
device software
(NAMUR recommendation 53)
– US unit Kgal
10.2003
Amplifier:
1.06.XX
Communication module:
2.03.XX
Software expansion:
– Language groups
– New error messages
– SIL 2
– The totalizer values are also updated
without integration into the cyclic data
transmission
– Support of compatibility with previous
PROFIBUS model Promag
33 with Profile Version 2.0
New functions:
– Operation hours counter
– Intensity of background illumination
adjustable
– Counter for access code
– Upload/download via ToF Tool - Fieldtool
Package
Compatible with service protocol:
– ToF-Tool FieldTool Package
(the latest SW version can be downloaded
under: www.tof-fieldtool.endress.com)
Endress+Hauser
12.2002
Communication module:
2.02.XX
Software adjustment
09.2002
Amplifier:
1.04.XX
Communication module:
2.01.XX
Software expansion:
– Data length of advanced diagnosis adjusted
in the cyclic data transmission
!
Note!
As of this software version, a new device
master file (GSD) must be used when replacing
the device!
03.2002
Amplifier:
1.03.XX
Communication module:
2.00.01
Software expansion:
– Communication software can be updated via
service protocol
07.2001
Com. module: 1.01.00
Software adjustment
06.2001
Amplifier: 1.02.00
Software adjustment
04.2001
Com. module: 1.00.00
Original software
09.2000
Amplifier: 1.01.01
Software adjustment
08.2000
Amplifier: 1.01.00
Software enhancement (functional adaptations)
04.2000
Amplifier: 1.00.00
Original software
50099246/10.03
50099246/04.01
151
Technical data
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
10
Technical data
10.1
Technical data at a glance
10.1.1
Applications
→ ä5
10.1.2
Function and system design
Measuring principle
Electromagnetic flow measurement on the basis of Faraday’s Law.
Measuring system
→ ä7
10.1.3
Input variables
Measured variable
Flow rate (proportional to induced voltage)
Measuring range
Typically v = 0.01 to 10 m/s (0.03 to 0.33 ft/s) with the specified measuring accuracy
Operable flow range
Over 1000 : 1
Input signal
Status input (auxiliary input):
U = 3 to 30 V DC, Ri = 3 kΩ, galvanically isolated.
Switch level: ±3 to ±30 VDC, independent of polarity
10.1.4
Output signal
Output variables
Current output
Active/passive selectable, galvanically isolated, time constant selectable (0.01 to 100 s),
Full scale value adjustable, temperature coefficient: typically 0.005% o.r./°C, resolution: 0.5 μA
• Active: 0/4 to 20 mA, RL max. 700 Ω
• Passive: 4 to 20 mA; supply voltage VS 18 to 30 V DC; Ri ≥ 150 Ω
Pulse/frequency output:
Active/passive selectable, galvanically isolated
• Active: 24 V DC, 25 mA (max. 250 mA during 20 ms), RL > 100 Ω
• Passive: open collector, 30 V DC, 250 mA
• Frequency output: full scale frequency 2 to 10000 Hz (fmax = 12500 Hz), on/off ratio 1:1, pulse
width max. 2 s
• Pulse output: pulse value and pulse polarity selectable, pulse width configur. (0.05 to 2000 ms)
PROFIBUS DP interface:
• PROFIBUS DP in accordance with IEC 61158, galvanically isolated
• Profile Version 3.0
• Data transmission rate: 9.6 kBaud to 12 MBaud
• Automatic identification of data transmission rate
• Signal coding: NRZ code
• Bus address can be configured via miniature switches or via the local display (optional)
152
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Technical data
PROFIBUS PA interface:
• PROFIBUS PA in accordance with IEC 61158 (MBP), galvanically isolated
• Profile Version 3.0
• Data transmission rate: 31.25 kBaud
• Current consumption: 11 mA
• Permitted supply voltage: 9 to 32 V
• Bus connection with integrated reverse polarity protection
• Error current FDE (Fault Disconnection Electronic): 0 mA
• Signal coding: Manchester II
• Bus address can be configured via miniature switches or via the local display (optional)
Signal on alarm
Current output:
Failsafe mode selectable (e.g. in accordance with NAMUR recommendation NE 43)
Pulse/frequency output:
Failsafe mode selectable
Relay output:
De-energized by fault or power supply failure
PROFIBUS DP/PA
Status and alarm messages in accordance with PROFIBUS Profile Version 3.0
Load
See "Output signal"
Switching output
Relay output:
Normally closed (NC or break) or normally open (NO or make) contacts available (default: relay 1
= NO, relay 2 = NC),
max. 30 V / 0.5 A AC; 60 V / 0.1 A DC, galvanically isolated.
Low flow cut off
Switch points for low flow are selectable.
Galvanic isolation
All circuits for inputs, outputs, and power supply are galvanically isolated from each other.
10.1.5
Power supply
Electrical connections
→ ä 40
Supply voltage
85 to 260 V AC, 45 to 65 Hz
20 to 55 V AC, 45 to 65 Hz
16 to 62 V DC
Cable entries
Power supply and signal cables (inputs/outputs):
• Cable entry M20 x 1.5 (8 to 12 mm; 0.31 to 0.47 in)
• Sensor cable entry for armored cables M20 x 1.5 (9.5 to 16 mm; 0.37 to 0.63 in)
• Threads for cable entries, ½" NPT, G ½"
Connecting cable for remote version:
• Cable entry M20 x 1.5 (8 to 12 mm; 0.31 to 0.47 in)
• Sensor cable entry for armored cables M20 x 1.5 (9.5 to 16 mm; 0.37 to 0.63 in)
• Threads for cable entries, ½" NPT, G ½"
Cable specifications
(remote version)
Endress+Hauser
→ ä 48
153
Technical data
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Power consumption
AC: <15 VA (including sensor)
DC: <15 W (including sensor)
Switch-on current:
• max. 13.5 A (< 50 ms) at 24 V DC
• max. 3 A (< 5 ms) at 260 V AC
Power supply failure
Lasting min. 1 power cycle
• EEPROM or T-DAT saves measuring system data if power supply fails
• S-DAT: exchangeable data storage device which stores the data of the sensor (nominal diameter,
serial number, calibration factor, zero point, etc.)
Potential matching
→ ä 56
10.1.6
Reference operating
conditions
Performance characteristics
To DIN EN 29104 and VDI/VDE 2641:
• Fluid temperature: +28 °C ± 2 K
• Ambient temperature: +22 °C ± 2 K
• Warm-up time: 30 minutes
Installation:
• Inlet run >10 × DN
• Outlet run > 5 × DN
• Sensor and transmitter grounded.
• Sensor centered relative to the pipe.
Maximum measured error
!
Standard: ±0.2% o.r. ± 2 mm/s (o.r. = of reading)
Note!
Supply-voltage fluctuations have no effect within the specified range.
[%]
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0
0
0
1
2
5
4
10
6
15
20
8
25
10
30
32
[m/s]
v
[ft]
a0004456
Fig. 72:
Repeatability
154
Max. measured error in % of reading
Standard: max. ±0.1% o.r. ± 0.5 mm/s (o.r. = of reading)
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Technical data
10.1.7
Operating conditions: Installation
Installation instructions
→ ä 13
Inlet and outlet runs
Inlet run: typically ≥ 5 × DN
Outlet run: typically ≥ 2 × DN
Length of connecting cable
• The permissible cable length Lmax for the remote version depends on the conductivity of the
medium → ä 20.
• A minimum conductivity of 20 μS/cm is required to measure demineralized water.
10.1.8
Ambient temperature range
!
Operating conditions: Environment
Transmitter:
• Standard: –20 to +60 °C (–4 to +140 °F)
• Optional: –40 to +60 °C (–40 to +140 °F)
Note!
At ambient temperatures below –20 °C (–4 °F), the readability of the display may be impaired.
Sensor:
• Flange material carbon steel: –10 to +60 °C (+14 to +140 °F)
• Flange material stainless steel: –40 to +60 °C (–40 to +140 °F)
"
Caution!
Do not exceed the min. and max. temperatures for the lining of the measuring tube
(→ "Medium temperature range").
Note the following points:
• Install the device at a shady location. Avoid direct sunlight, particularly in warm climatic regions.
• If both fluid and ambient temperatures are high, install the transmitter at a remote location from
the sensor (→ "Medium temperature range").
Storage temperature
The storage temperature corresponds to the operating temperature range of the transmitter and
sensor.
"
Caution!
• The measuring device must be protected against direct sunlight during storage in order to avoid
unacceptably high surface temperatures.
• Choose a storage location where moisture does not collect in the measuring device. This will help
prevent fungus and bacteria infestation which can damage the lining.
Degree of protection
• Standard: IP 67 (NEMA 4X) for transmitter and sensor
• Optional: IP 68 (NEMA 6P) for remote version of Promag W and Promag P sensors
Shock and vibration resistance
Acceleration up to 2 g in accordance with IEC 600 68-2-6
(High-temperature version: no data available)
CIP cleaning
"
Caution!
The maximum fluid temperature permitted for the measuring device must not be exceeded.
CIP cleaning possible:
Promag P, Promag H
CIP cleaning not possible:
Promag W
Endress+Hauser
155
Technical data
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
SIP cleaning
"
Caution!
The maximum fluid temperature permitted for the measuring device must not be exceeded.
SIP cleaning possible:
Promag P (with PFA lining), Promag H
SIP cleaning not possible:
Promag W
Electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC)
• As per IEC/EN 61326 and NAMUR Recommendation NE 21
• Emission: to limit value for industry EN 55011
10.1.9
Medium temperature range
Operating conditions: Process
The permitted temperature depends on the lining of the measuring tube:
Promag W
• 0 to +80 °C (+32 to +176 °F) for hard rubber (DN 50 to 2000 / 2½ to 80")
• –20 to +50 °C (–4 to +122 °F) for polyurethane (DN 25 to 1200 / 1 to 48")
Promag P
Standard
• –40 to +130 °C (–40 to +266 °F) for PTFE (DN 15 to 600 / ½" to 24"),
restrictions → see diagrams below
• –20 to +130 °C (–4 to +266 °F) for PFA/HE (DN 25 to 200 / 1" to 8"),
restrictions → see diagrams below
• –20 to +150 °C (–4 to +302 °F) for PFA (DN 25 to 200 / 1" to 8"),
restrictions → see diagrams below
Optional
High-temperature version (HT): –20 to +180 °C (–4 to +356 °F) for PFA (DN 25 to 200 / 1" to 8")
TA [°F]
140
100
[°C]
60
HT
40
n
20
0
0
-20
-40
-40
PFA
m
PTFE
-40 -20
-40
0
0
20
40
100
60
80 100 120 140 160 180
200
300
[°C]
TF
360 [°F]
A0002660
Fig. 73:
Promag P compact version (with PFA or PTFE lining)
TA = ambient temperature; TF = fluid temperature; HT = high-temperature version with insulation
➀ = Light gray area → temperature range from –10 to –40 °C (–14 to –40 °F) applies only to stainless steel flanges
n = Diagonally hatched area → foam lining (HE) + degree of protection IP68 = fluid temperature max. 130°C / 266 °F
156
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Technical data
TA [°F]
140
100
[°C]
60
HT
40
n
20
0
0
-40
PFA
-20
m
PTFE
-40
-40 -20
-40
0
0
20
40
60
100
80 100 120 140 160 180
200
300
[°C]
TF
360 [°F]
a0002671
Fig. 74:
Remote versions (with PFA or PTFE lining)
TA = ambient temperature; TF = fluid temperature; HT = high-temperature version with insulation
➀ = Light gray area → temperature range from –10 to –40 °C (–14 to –40 °F) applies only to stainless steel flanges
n = Diagonally hatched area → foam lining (HE) + degree of protection IP68 = fluid temperature max. 130°C / 266 °F
Promag H
Sensor:
• DN 2 to 25: –20 to +150 °C (–4 to +302 °F)
• DN 40 to 100: –20 to +150 °C (–4 to +302 °F)
Seals:
• EPDM: –20 to +150 °C (–4 to +302 °F)
• Silicone: –20 to +150 °C (–4 to +302 °F)
• Viton: –20 to +150 °C (–4 to +302 °F)
• Kalrez: –20 to +150 °C (–4 to +302 °F)
Conductivity of the fluid
!
Endress+Hauser
The minimum conductivity is ≥ 5 μS/cm (for demineralized water ≥ 20 μS/cm)
Note!
In the remote version, the required minimum conductivity is also influenced by the length of the
connecting cable → ä 20.
157
Technical data
Limiting medium pressure
range (nominal pressure)
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Promag W
• EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501)
– PN 6 (DN 350 to 2000)
– PN 10 (DN 200 to 2000)
– PN 16 (DN 65 to 2000)
– PN 25 (DN 200 to 1000)
– PN 40 (DN 25 to 150)
• ANSI B 16.5
– Class 150 (1" to 24")
– Class 300 (1" to 6")
• AWWA
– Class D (28" to 78")
• JIS B2220
– 10 K (DN 50 to 300)
– 20 K (DN 25 to 300)
• AS 2129
– Table E (DN 80, 100, 150 to 1200)
• AS 4087
– PN 16 (DN 80, 100, 150 to 1200)
Promag P
• EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501)
– PN 10 (DN 200 to 600)
– PN 16 (DN 65 to 600)
– PN 25 (DN 200 to 600)
– PN 40 (DN 15 to 150)
• ANSI B 16.5
– Class 150 (½" to 24")
– Class 300 (½" to 6")
• JIS B2220
– 10 K (DN 50 to 300)
– 20 K (DN 15 to 300)
• AS 2129
– Table E (DN 25, 50)
• AS 4087
– PN 16 (DN 50)
Promag H
The permitted nominal pressure depends on the process connection and the seal:
• 40 bar → flange, weld nipple (with O-ring seal)
• 16 bar → all other process connections
Pressure tightness (measuring
tube lining)
Promag W
Promag W
nominal diameter
158
Measuring
tube lining
Resistance of measuring tube lining to partial vacuum: limit values for
absolute pressure [mbar] ([psi]) at various fluid temperatures
25 °C
50 °C
80° C
100 °C
130 °C
150 °C
180 °C
[mm]
[inch]
77 °F
122 °F
176° F
212 °F
266 °F
302 °F
356 °F
25 to 1200
1 to 48"
Polyurethane
0
0
-
-
-
-
-
50 to 2000
3 to 78"
Hard rubber
0
0
0
-
-
-
-
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Technical data
Promag P
Measuring tube lining: PFA
Promag P
nominal diameter
Resistance of measuring tube lining to partial vacuum: limit values for
absolute pressure [mbar] ([psi]) at various fluid temperatures
25 °C
80° C
100 °C
130 °C
150 °C
180 °C
[mm]
[inch]
77 °F
176° F
212 °F
266 °F
302 °F
356 °F
25
1"
0
0
0
0
0
0
32
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
40
1 ½"
0
0
0
0
0
0
50
2"
0
0
0
0
0
0
65
-
0
*
0
0
0
0
80
3"
0
*
0
0
0
0
100
4"
0
*
0
0
0
0
125
-
0
*
0
0
0
0
150
6"
0
*
0
0
0
0
200
8"
0
*
0
0
0
0
* No value can be quoted.
Promag P
Measuring tube lining: PTFE
Promag P
Resistance of measuring tube lining to partial vacuum: limit values for
nominal diameter absolute pressure [mbar] ([psi]) at various fluid temperatures
25 °C
80° C
100 °C
130 °C
150 °C
180 °C
77 °F
176° F
212 °F
266 °F
302 °F
356 °F
[mm]
[inch]
[mbar]
[psi]
[mbar]
[psi]
[mbar]
[psi]
15
½"
0
0
0
0
0
100
1,45
–
–
25
1"
0
0
0
0
0
100
1,45
–
–
32
-
0
0
0
0
0
100
1,45
–
–
40
1 ½"
0
0
0
0
0
100
1,45
–
–
50
2"
0
0
0
0
0
100
1,45
–
–
65
-
0
0
*
40
0,58
130
1,89
–
–
80
3"
0
0
*
40
0,58
130
1,89
–
–
100
4"
0
0
*
135
1,96
170
2,47
–
–
125
-
135
1,96
*
240
3,48
385
5,58
–
–
150
6"
135
1,96
*
240
3,48
385
5,58
–
–
200
8"
200
2,90
*
290
4,21
410
5,95
–
–
250
10"
330
4,79
*
400
5,80
530
7,69
–
–
300
12"
400
5,80
*
500
7,25
630
9,14
–
–
350
14"
470
6,82
*
600
8,70
730
10,59
–
–
400
16"
540
7,83
*
670
9,72
800
11,60
–
–
450
18"
500
20"
600
24"
Partial vacuum is impermissible
* No value can be quoted.
Endress+Hauser
159
Technical data
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Promag H (measuring tube lining: PFA)
Promag H
nominal diameter
Pressure tightness, measuring tube lining: limit values for
absolute pressure [mbar] ([psi]) at various fluid temperature
25 °C
80° C
100 °C
130 °C
150 °C
180 °C
[mm]
[inch]
77 °F
176° F
212 °F
266 °F
302 °F
356 °F
2 to 100
1/12 to 4"
0
0
0
0
0
0
Limiting flow
Further information can be found in the "Nominal diameter and flow rate" → ä 18 section
Pressure loss
• No pressure loss if the sensor is installed in piping with the same nominal diameter (for Promag H
only from DN8).
• Pressure losses for configurations incorporating adapters according to DIN EN 545 → ä 17.
160
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Technical data
10.1.10 Mechanical construction
Design / dimensions
The dimensions and face-to-face length of the sensor and transmitter can be found in the separate
"Technical Information" documentation for each device which can be downloaded in PDF format
from www.endress.com. A list of available "Technical Information" documentation can be found in
the "Documentation" → ä 170 section.
Weight (SI units)
Promag W
!
Note!
The following weights apply to standard pressure ratings and without packaging material.
Nominal
diameter
Weights in [kg] for the Promag W
Compact version
Remote version (without cable)
Sensor
[mm]
EN (DIN) / AS*
JIS
EN (DIN) / AS*
Transmitter
JIS
7,3
5,3
5,3
6,0
32
8,0
7,3
6,0
5,3
6,0
9,4
8,3
7,4
6,3
6,0
40
PN 40
7,3
PN 40
25
8,6
7,3
6,0
11,1
10,0
9,1
6,0
80
14,0
16,0
12,5
14,7
12,0
PN 16
100
14,0
10K
9,3
12,0
10K
10,6
65
PN 16
50
10,5
6,0
12,7
6,0
125
21,5
21,0
19,5
19,0
6,0
150
25,5
24,5
23,5
22,5
6,0
43
39,9
6,0
63
67,4
6,0
68
70,3
6,0
41,9
65
69,4
300
70
72,3
350
115
103
6,0
375
134
133
6,0
400
135
118
6,0
159
6,0
175
154
6,0
600
235
206
6,0
700
355
302
6,0
800
435
355
6,0
900
575
483
6,0
1000
700
587
6,0
1200
850
848
6,0
1400
1300
1298
6,0
1700
1698
6,0
1800
2200
2198
6,0
2000
2800
2798
6,0
1600
PN 6
175
500
PN 6
450
PN 10
45
250
PN 10
200
Promag transmitter (compact version): 3.4 kg
*Only DN 80, 100, 150 to 400, 500 and 600 are available for flanges as per AS
Endress+Hauser
161
Technical data
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Promag P
!
Note!
The following weights apply to standard pressure ratings and without packaging material.
Nominal
diameter
Weights in [kg] for the Promag P
Compact version
Remote version (without cable)
Sensor
[mm]
EN (DIN) / AS*
JIS
EN (DIN) / AS*
Transmitter
JIS
6.5
4.5
4.5
6.0
25
7.3
7.3
5.3
5.3
6.0
8.0
7.3
6.0
5.3
6.0
32
PN 40
6.5
PN 40
15
8.3
7.4
6.3
6.0
10.6
9.3
8.6
7.3
6.0
100
11.1
10.0
12.5
12.0
PN 16
12.0
14.0
PN 16
65
80
10K
9.4
50
10K
40
9.1
6.0
10.5
6.0
14.4
14.7
14.0
12.7
6.0
125
16.0
21.0
19.5
19.0
6.0
150
21.5
24.5
23.5
22.5
6.0
200
45
41.9
43
39.9
6.0
69.4
63
67.4
6.0
72.3
68
70.3
6.0
350
115
400
PN 10
65
70
PN 10
250
300
135
113
6.0
133
6.0
450
175
173
6.0
500
175
173
6.0
600
235
233
6.0
Promag transmitter (compact version): 3.4 kg
High-temperature version: +1.5 kg
* Only DN 25 and 50 are available for flanges as per AS
Promag H
!
Note!
The following weights apply to standard pressure ratings and without packaging material.
Nominal
diameter
DIN
Weights in [kg] for the Promag H
Compact version
[mm]
Remote version (without cable)
Sensor
Transmitter
2
5.2
2.0
6.0
4
5.2
2.0
6.0
8
5.3
2.0
6.0
15
5.4
1.9
6.0
25
5.5
2.8
6.0
40
6.5
4.5
6.0
50
9.0
7.0
6.0
65
9.5
7.5
6.0
80
19.0
17.0
6.0
100
18.5
16.5
6.0
Promag transmitter (compact version): 3.4 kg
162
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Weight (US units)
Technical data
Promag W
!
Note!
The following weights apply to standard pressure ratings and without packaging material.
Nominal
diameter
Weights in [lbs] for the Promag W
Compact version
Remote version (without cable)
Sensor
[inch]
Transmitter
ANSI/AWWA
ANSI/AWWA
12
13
21
16
13
2"
23
19
13
3"
31
26
13
4"
35
31
13
6"
56
52
13
8"
10"
99
143
Class 150
16
Class 150
1"
1 ½"
95
13
161
13
12"
243
238
13
14"
386
381
13
16"
452
448
13
18"
562
558
13
20"
628
624
13
24"
893
889
13
28"
882
878
13
30"
1014
1010
13
1208
13
1764
1760
13
40"
1985
1980
13
2421
13
42"
48"
2426
3087
Class D
1213
Class D
32"
36"
3083
13
54"
4851
4847
13
60"
5954
5949
13
66"
8159
8154
13
72"
9041
9036
13
78"
10143
10139
13
Promag transmitter (compact version): 7.5 lbs
Endress+Hauser
163
Technical data
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Promag P
!
Note!
The following weights apply to standard pressure ratings and without packaging material.
Nominal
diameter
Weights in [lbs] for the Promag P
Compact version
Remote version (without cable)
Sensor
[inch]
Transmitter
ANSI/AWWA
ANSI/AWWA
½"
14
10
13
1"
16
12
13
21
16
13
2"
23
19
13
3"
31
26
13
4"
35
31
13
52
13
95
13
10"
56
Class 150
6"
8"
99
165
12"
Class 150
1 ½"
243
161
13
238
13
14"
386
381
13
16"
452
448
13
18"
562
558
13
20"
628
624
13
24"
893
889
13
Promag transmitter (compact version): 7.5 lbs
High-temperature version: + 3.3 lbs
Promag H
!
Note!
The following weights apply to standard pressure ratings and without packaging material.
Nominal
diameter
Weights in [lbs] for the Promag H
Compact version
[inch]
Remote version (without cable)
Sensor
Transmitter
1/12"
11.5
4.4
13.5
5/32"
11.5
4.4
13.5
5/16"
11.7
4.4
13.5
½"
11.9
4.2
13.5
1"
12.1
6.2
13.5
1½"
14.3
9.9
13.2
2"
19.8
15.5
13.2
3"
41.9
37.5
13.2
4"
40.8
36.5
13.2
Promag transmitter (compact version): 7.5 lbs
164
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Material
Technical data
Promag W
• Transmitter housing:
– Housing for compact version: powder-coated die-cast aluminum
– Wall-mount housing: powder-coated die-cast aluminum
• Sensor housing
– DN 25 to 300: powder-coated die-cast aluminum
– DN 350 to 2000: with protective coating
• Measuring tube
– DN ≤ 300: stainless steel 1.4301 or 1.4306/304L
for flanges made of carbon steel with Al/Zn protective coating
– DN ≥ 350: stainless steel 1.4301 or 1.4306/304
for flanges made of carbon steel with protective coating
• Electrodes: 1.4435, Alloy C-22, tantalum
• Flanges
– EN 1092-1 (DIN2501): 1.4571/316L; RSt37-2 (S235JRG2); C22; FE 410W B
(DN ≤ 300: with Al/Zn protective coating; DN ≥ 350 with protective varnish)
– ANSI: A105; F316L
(DN ≤ 300 with Al/Zn protective coating; DN ≥ 350 with protective varnish)
– AWWA: 1.0425
– JIS: RSt37-2 (S235JRG2); HII; 1.0425/316L
(DN ≤ 300 with Al/Zn protective coating; DN ≥ 350 with protective varnish)
– AS 2129
– (DN 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 450, 600…1200) A105 or RSt37-2 (S235JRG2)
– (DN 80, 350, 400, 500) A105 or St44-2 (S275JR)
– AS 4087: A105 or St44-2 (S275JR)
• Seals: as per DIN EN 1514-1
• Ground disks: 1.4435/316L, Alloy C-22, titanium, tantalum
Promag P
• Transmitter housing:
– Compact housing: powder-coated die-cast aluminum
– Wall-mount housing: powder-coated die-cast aluminum
• Sensor housing
– DN 15 to 300: powder-coated die-cast aluminum
– DN 350 to 2000: with protective coating
• Measuring tube
– DN ≤ 300: stainless steel 1.4301 or 1.4306/304L
for flanges made of carbon steel with protective coating
– DN ≥ 350: stainless steel 1.4301 or 1.4306/304
for flanges made of carbon steel with protective coating
• Electrodes: 1.4435, platinum, Alloy C-22, tantalum, titanium
• Flanges
– EN 1092-1 (DIN2501): 1.4571/316L; RSt37-2 (S235JRG2); C22; FE 410W B
(DN ≤ 300: with Al/Zn protective coating; DN ≥ 350 with protective varnish)
– ANSI: A105; F316L
(DN ≤ 300 with Al/Zn protective coating; DN ≥ 350 with protective varnish)
– AWWA: 1.0425
– JIS: RSt37-2 (S235JRG2); HII; 1.0425/316L
(DN ≤ 300 with Al/Zn protective coating; DN ≥ 350 with protective varnish)
– AS 2129
– (DN 25) A105 or RSt37-2 (S235JRG2)
– (DN 40) A105 or St44-2 (S275JR)
– AS 4087: A105 or St44-2 (S275JR)
Endress+Hauser
165
Technical data
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
• Seals: as per DIN EN 1514-1
• Ground disks: 1.4435/316L, Alloy C-22, titanium, tantalum
Promag H
• Transmitter housing:
– Compact housing: powder-coated die-cast aluminum or stainless steel field housing
(1.4301/316L)
– Wall-mount housing: powder-coated die-cast aluminum
– Window material: glass or polycarbonate
• Sensor housing: stainless steel 1.4301
• Wall mounting kit (holder panel): stainless steel 1.4301
• Measuring tube: stainless steel 1.4301
• Lining material: PFA (USP Class VI; FDA 21 CFR 177.1550; 3A)
• Electrodes:
– Standard: 1.4435
– Optional: Alloy C-22, tantalum, platinum (only up to DN 25 (1"))
• Flanges:
– All connections stainless-steel 1.4404/316L
– EN (DIN), ANSI, JIS made of PVDF
– Adhesive fitting made of PVC
• Seals:
– DN 2 to 25: O-ring (EPDM, Viton, Kalrez) or molded seal (EPDM*, silicone*, Viton)
– DN 40 to 100: molded seal (EPDM*, silicone*)
• Grounding rings:
– Standard: 1.4435/316L,
– Optional: Alloy C-22, tantalum
*
= USP Class VI; FDA 21 CFR 177.2600; 3A
Material load diagrams
The material load diagrams (pressure-temperature diagrams) for the process connections can be
found in the separate "Technical Information" documentation, which you can download in PDF
format from www.endress.com.
A list of available "Technical Information" documentation can be found in the "Documentation"
→ ä 170 section.
Fitted electrodes
Promag W
Available as standard:
• 2 measuring electrodes for signal detection
• 1 EPD electrode for empty pipe detection
• 1 Reference electrode for potential equalization
Optionally available:
• Exchangeable measuring electrodes for DN 350 to 2000 (14" to 78")
Promag P
Available as standard:
• 2 measuring electrodes for signal detection
• 1 EPD electrode for empty pipe detection
• 1 Reference electrode for potential equalization
Optionally available:
• Platinum measuring electrodes only
166
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Technical data
Promag H
• 2 measuring electrodes for signal detection
• 1 EPD electrode for empty pipe detection, not for DN 2 to 15 (1/12" to ½")
Process connection
Promag W and Promag P
Flange connections:
• EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501)
– DN ≤ 300 = form A
– DN ≥ 350 = form B
– DN 65 PN 16 and DN 600 PN 16 exclusively according to EN 1092-1
• ANSI
• AWWA (Promag W only)
• JIS
• AS
Promag H
With O-ring:
• Weld nipple DIN (EN), ISO 1127, ODT/SMS
• Flange EN (DIN), ANSI, JIS
• Flange made of PVDF EN (DIN), ANSI, JIS
• External thread
• Internal thread
• Hose connection
• PVC adhesive fitting
With molded seal:
• Weld nipple DIN 11850, ODT/SMS
• Clamp ISO 2852, DIN 32676, L14 AM7
• Coupling DIN 11851, DIN 11864-1, ISO 2853, SMS 1145
• Flange DIN 11864-2
Surface roughness
All data relate to parts in contact with fluid.
• Liner → PFA: ≤ 0.4 μm (15 μin)
• Electrodes: 0.3 to 0.5 μm (12 to 20 μin)
• Process connection made of stainless-steel (Promag H): ≤ 0.8 μm (31 μin)
Endress+Hauser
167
Technical data
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
10.1.11 Human interface
Display elements
• Liquid crystal display: illuminated, four lines with 16 characters per line
• Selectable display of different measured values and status variables
• 3 totalizers
• At ambient temperatures below -20 °C (–15 °F) the readability of the display may be impaired.
Operating elements
• Local operation with three optical keys (S/O/F)
• Application-specific Quick Setup menus for straightforward commissioning
Language groups
Language groups available for operation in different countries:
• Western Europe and America (WEA):
English, German, Spanish, Italian, French, Dutch and Portuguese
• Eastern Europe and Scandinavia (EES):
English, Russian, Polish, Norwegian, Finnish, Swedish and Czech.
• South and east Asia (SEA):
English, Japanese, Indonesian
• China (CN):
English, Chinese
!
Note!
You can change the language group via the operating program "FieldCare".
10.1.12 Certificates and approvals
CE mark
The measuring system is in conformity with the statutory requirements of the EC Directives.
Endress+Hauser confirms successful testing of the device by affixing to it the CE mark.
C-Tick symbol
The measuring system complies with the EMC requirements of the "Australian Communications
and Media Authority (ACMA)".
Ex approval
Information about currently available Ex versions (ATEX, FM, CSA, TIIS, IECEx, NEPSI etc.) can
be supplied by your Endress+Hauser Sales Center on request. All explosion protection data are
given in a separate documentation which is available upon request.
Sanitary compatibility
Promag W and Promag P
No applicable approvals or certification
Promag H
• 3A-approval and EHEDG-tested
• Seals: FDA-compliant (except for Kalrez seals)
Drinking water approval
Promag W
• WRAS BS 6920
• ACS
• NSF 61
• KTW/W270
Promag P
• ACS
168
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
PROFIBUS DP/PA
certification
Technical data
The flowmeter has successfully passed all the test procedures carried out and is certified and
registered by the PNO (PROFIBUS User Organization). The device thus meets all the requirements
of the following specifications:
• Certified in accordance with PROFIBUS Profile Version 3.0 (device certification number: available
on request)
• The measuring device can also be operated with certified devices of other manufacturers
(interoperability).
Pressure device approval
The measuring devices can be ordered with or without PED (Pressure Equipment Directive). If a
device with PED is required, this must be ordered explicitly. For devices with nominal diameters
less than or equal to DN 25 (1"), this is neither possible nor necessary.
• With the identification PED/G1/III on the sensor nameplate, Endress+Hauser confirms
conformity with the "Basic safety requirements" of Appendix I of the Pressure Equipment
Directive 97/23/EC.
• Devices with this identification (with PED) are suitable for the following types of fluid:
– Fluids of Group 1 and 2 with a steam pressure of greater or less than 0.5 bar (7.3 psi)
– Unstable gases
• Devices without this identification (without PED) are designed and manufactured according to
good engineering practice. They correspond to the requirements of Art. 3, Section 3 of the
Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC. Their application is illustrated in Diagrams 6 to 9 in
Appendix II of the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC.
Other standards and
guidelines
• EN 60529:
Degrees of protection by housing (IP code)
• EN 61010-1
Protection measures for electrical equipment for measurement, control, regulation and laboratory
procedures
• IEC/EN 61326
"Emission in accordance with requirements for class A".
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC requirements).
• ANSI/ISA-S82.01
Safety Standard for Electrical and Electronic Test, Measuring, Controlling and related Equipment
- General Requirements. Pollution degree 2, Installation Category II.
• CAN/CSA-C22.2 (No. 1010.1-92)
Safety requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement and Control and Laboratory Use.
Pollution degree 2, Installation Category I.
• NAMUR NE 21
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) of industrial process and laboratory control equipment.
• NAMUR NE 43
Standardization of the signal level for the breakdown information of digital transmitters with
analog output signal.
• NAMUR NE 53
Software of field devices and signal-processing devices with digital electronics.
Endress+Hauser
169
Technical data
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
10.1.13 Ordering information
The Endress+Hauser service organization can provide detailed ordering information and
information on the order codes on request.
10.1.14 Accessories
!
Various accessories are available for the transmitter and the sensor. These can be ordered separately
from Endress+Hauser → ä 123.
Note!
For detailed information on specific order codes, please contact the Endress+Hauser service
organization.
10.1.15 Documentation
• Flow Measurement (FA005D/06)
• Promag 53W Technical Information (TI046D/06)
• Promag 53P Technical Information (TI047D/06)
• Promag 53H Technical Information (TI048D/06)
• Description of device functions Promag 53, PROFIBUS DP/PA (BA064D/06)
• Supplementary documentation on Ex-ratings: ATEX, FM, CSA
170
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Index
Index
A
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Acyclic data transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Adapters (installation of sensors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Ambient temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Applicator (selection and configuration software) . . . . . . . 124
Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
B
Batching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Quick Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Block model
PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
PROFIBUS PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Bus structure
PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
C
Cable entries
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Cable length (remote version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Cable specification
PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
PROFIBUS PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Cable specifications (remote version)
Cable length, conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Cable type
PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
PROFIBUS PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Calibration factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
CE mark (declaration of conformity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
CIP cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Cleaning
Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Cleaning using pigs, Promag H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Code entry (function matrix) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Commissioning
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Quick Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Communication
Quick Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Conductivity of fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Conductivity of the fluid
Length of connecting cable (remote version). . . . . . . . . 20
Connection
see Electrical connection
Control
FieldCare. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
C-Tick symbol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Current output
Configuration active/passive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Endress+Hauser
Cyclic data transmission
PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFIBUS PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cyclic data transmission PROFIBUS DP
Block model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL module . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cyclic data transmission PROFIBUS PA
Block model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL module . . . . . . . . . . . .
100
110
100
104
110
114
D
Data back-up (of device data with T-DAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Data transmission
Acyclic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Declaration of conformity (CE mark) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 155
Device address, configuring
PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
PROFIBUS PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Device description files
PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
PROFIBUS PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Device designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Device status, display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Display
Local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Turning the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Disposal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Documentation, supplementary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Down pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Drinking water approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
E
Electrical connection
Degree of protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Potential equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Electrode cleaning circuitry
See the "Description of Device Functions" manual . . . . 15
Electrodes
Electrode Cleaning Circuitry (ECC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
EPD electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Exchangeable measuring electrodes (replacement) . . . 148
Measuring electrode plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Reference electrode (potential equalization) . . . . . . . . . 15
Electronics boards (installing/removing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Field housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
EMC ( Electromagnetic compatibility) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Empty pipe detection (EPD)
EPD electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Empty-pipe/Full-pipe adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Error limits
See Performance characteristics
171
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Index
Error messages
Process errors (application errors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
System error (device error) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Error types (system and process errors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Europäische Druckgeräterichtlinie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Ex approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Exchangeable measuring electrodes, Replacement . . . . . . 148
Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Installing the sensor
Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Foundations (DN > 300) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-temperature version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promag H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promag P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promag W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insulation of pipes (installing Promag P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F
L
Fault message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
F-Chip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Fieldcheck ( tester and simulator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Fitted electrodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Flow rate/limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Frequency output
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Function descriptions
see the "Description of Device Functions" manual
Function groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Fuse, replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Language groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Length of connecting cable (remote version) . . . . . . . . . .
Load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local display
see Display
Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G
Galvanic isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Ground cable
Promag P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Promag W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Grounding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Grounding rings
Promag H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
H
Hardware write protection
PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
PROFIBUS PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Hazardous substances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
High-temperature version
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Temperature ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
HOME position (display operating mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
I
Icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Inlet run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Input signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Installation Wall-mount housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Installation conditions
Down pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Foundations, supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Inlet and outlet runs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Installing pumps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Mounting location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Orientation (vertical, horizontal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Partially filled pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
172
17
17
28
32
27
21
28
168
155
153
153
M
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Material load diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Measured value status, display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Measured variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Measuring electrodes
See Electrodes
Measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Measuring range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Measuring tube
Lining, temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Medium pressure range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Medium temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Module
AI (Analog Input)
PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
PROFIBUS PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
BATCHING_FIX_COMP_QUANTITY
PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
BATCHING_QUANTITY
PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
CONTROL_BLOCK
PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
PROFIBUS PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
DISPLAY_VALUE
PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
PROFIBUS PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
EMPTY_MODULE
PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
PROFIBUS PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL
PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
PROFIBUS PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
SETTOT_TOTAL
PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
PROFIBUS PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
TOTAL
PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
PROFIBUS PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Endress+Hauser
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
N
Nameplate
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Nominal diameter and flow rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Notice message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
O
Operable flow range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Operation
Function matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Order code
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Ordering information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Outlet runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
PROFIBUS PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
P
Performance characteristics
Maximum measured error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Reference operating conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Pigs (cleaning). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Post-installation check (checklist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Power supply (supply voltage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Power supply failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Pressure loss
Adapters (reducers, expanders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
General information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Pressure tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Process connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Process error
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Process error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
PROFIBUS DP
Bus structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Cable specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Cable type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Cyclic data transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Device address, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Device description files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Hardware write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Output signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Spur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Endress+Hauser
Index
PROFIBUS DP cyclic data transmission
AI (Analog Input) module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
BATCHING_FIX_COMP_QUANTITY module . . . . . . 107
BATCHING_QUANTITY module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
CONTROL_BLOCK module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
DISPLAY_VALUE module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
EMPTY_MODULE module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
SETTOT_TOTAL module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
TOTAL module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
PROFIBUS PA
Cable specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Cable type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Cyclic data transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Device address, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Device description files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Hardware write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Spur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
PROFIBUS PA cyclic data transmission
AI (Analog Input) module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
CONTROL_BLOCK module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
DISPLAY_VALUE module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
EMPTY_MODULE module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
SETTOT_TOTAL module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
TOTAL module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Programming mode
Disabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Promag H
Cleaning using pigs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Grounding rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Weld nipple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Promag P
Ground cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
High-temperature version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Promag W
Ground cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Pulsating flow
Quick Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Pulse output
see Frequency output
Pumps
Mounting location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
173
Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA
Index
Q
Quick Setup
Batching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data back-up (of device data with T-DAT) . . . . . . . . . .
Pulsating flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T
85
80
88
90
82
90
R
Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 153
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Replacement
Electronics boards (installing/removing) . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Exchangeable measuring electrodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Returning devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
S
Safety icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Sanitary compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
S-DAT (HistoROM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Seals
Promag H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Promag P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Promag W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Replacement, replacement seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Seals (sensor process connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 27
Sensor installation
See Installing sensor
Serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–9
Shielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Shielding of the supply line/T-box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Shock resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
SIP cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Software
Amplifier display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Spur
PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
PROFIBUS PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Standards, guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168–169
Status input
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Supplementary Ex documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Supply voltage (power supply) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Surface roughness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Switching output
see Relay output
System error
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
System error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
174
T-DAT (HistoROM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Save/load (data back-up, e.g. for replacing devices) . . . 90
Temperature
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Temperature ranges
Ambient temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Fluid temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Terminal assignment
PROFIBUS DP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
PROFIBUS PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Terminating resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Tightening torques
Promag P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Promag W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Transmitter
Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Installing the wall-mount housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Length of connecting cable (remote version) . . . . . . . . 20
Turning the field housing (aluminum) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Turning the field housing (stainless steel) . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Transporting the sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Troubleshooting and remedy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
V
Vibration resistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Measures to prevent vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Shock and vibration resistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
W
Wall-mount housing, installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Weight
(SI units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
(US units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Weld nipple, Promag H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Wiring
see Electrical connection
Writes (max.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Endress+Hauser
Declaration of Hazardous Material and De-Contamination
Erklärung zur Kontamination und Reinigung
Please reference the Return Authorization Number (RA#), obtained from Endress+Hauser, on all paperwork and mark the RA#
clearly on the outside of the box. If this procedure is not followed, it may result in the refusal of the package at our facility.
Bitte geben Sie die von E+H mitgeteilte Rücklieferungsnummer (RA#) auf allen Lieferpapieren an und vermerken Sie diese
auch außen auf der Verpackung. Nichtbeachtung dieser Anweisung führt zur Ablehnung ihrer Lieferung.
RA No.
Because of legal regulations and for the safety of our employees and operating equipment, we need the "Declaration of Hazardous Material
and De-Contamination", with your signature, before your order can be handled. Please make absolutely sure to attach it to the outside of the
packaging.
Aufgrund der gesetzlichen Vorschriften und zum Schutz unserer Mitarbeiter und Betriebseinrichtungen, benötigen wir die unterschriebene
"Erklärung zur Kontamination und Reinigung", bevor Ihr Auftrag bearbeitet werden kann. Bringen Sie diese unbedingt außen an der
Verpackung an.
Serial number
Seriennummer ________________________
Type of instrument / sensor
Geräte-/Sensortyp
____________________________________________
Used as SIL device in a Safety Instrumented System / Einsatz als SIL Gerät in Schutzeinrichtungen
Process data/Prozessdaten
Pressure / Druck
_____ [psi] _____ [ Pa ]
Viscosity /Viskosität _____ [cp] _____ [mm2/s]
Temperature / Temperatur_____ [°F] _____ [°C]
Conductivity / Leitfähigkeit ________ [µS/cm]
Medium and warnings
Warnhinweise zum Medium
Medium /concentration Identification flammable
CAS No.
Medium /Konzentration
entzündlich
toxic
giftig
corrosive
ätzend
harmful/
irritant
gesundheitsschädlich/
reizend
other *
harmless
sonstiges* unbedenklich
Process
medium
Medium im
Prozess
Medium for
process cleaning
Medium zur
Prozessreinigung
Returned part
cleaned with
Medium zur
Endreinigung
* explosive; oxidising; dangerous for the environment; biological risk; radioactive
* explosiv; brandfördernd; umweltgefährlich; biogefährlich; radioaktiv
Please tick should one of the above be applicable, include safety data sheet and, if necessary, special handling instructions.
Zutreffendes ankreuzen; trifft einer der Warnhinweise zu, Sicherheitsdatenblatt und ggf. spezielle Handhabungsvorschriften beilegen.
Description of failure / Fehlerbeschreibung __________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Company data /Angaben zum Absender
P/SF/Konta XIV
Company /Firma ___________________________________
_________________________________________________
Address / Adresse
_________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Phone number of contact person /Telefon-Nr. Ansprechpartner:
____________________________________________
Fax / E-Mail ____________________________________________
Your order No. / Ihre Auftragsnr. ____________________________
“We hereby certify that this declaration is filled out truthfully and completely to the best of our knowledge.We further certify that the returned
parts have been carefully cleaned. To the best of our knowledge they are free of any residues in dangerous quantities.”
“Wir bestätigen, die vorliegende Erklärung nach unserem besten Wissen wahrheitsgetreu und vollständig ausgefüllt zu haben. Wir bestätigen
weiter, dass die zurückgesandten Teile sorgfältig gereinigt wurden und nach unserem besten Wissen frei von Rückständen in gefahrbringender Menge sind.”
(place, date / Ort, Datum)
Name, dept./Abt. (please print /bitte Druckschrift)
Signature / Unterschrift
www.endress.com/worldwide
BA053D/06/EN/06.10
71116500
FM+SGML6.0 ProMoDo

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement